2 Corinthians 1:6 — Word Study

Greek	English	Parsing
εἴτε	If	Conjunction
δὲ	however	Conjunction
θλιβόμεθα,	we are constricted,	Verb, present, passive
ὑπὲρ	[it is] for
τῆς	<the>
ὑμῶν	your
παρακλήσεως	comfort
καὶ	and
σωτηρίας	salvation
εἴτε	if
παρακαλούμεθα,	we are encouraged,
ὑπὲρ	[it is] for	Preposition
τῆς	<the>	Article, genitive, singular
ὑμῶν	your	Personal pronoun, second person, genitive
παρακλήσεως	comfort	Noun, genitive, singular
και	and	Conjunction
σωτηριας	salvation	Noun, genitive, singular
τῆς	which	Article, genitive, singular
ἐνεργουμένης	is operating	Verb, present, middle
ἐν	in	Preposition
ὑπομονῇ	[the] endurance	Noun, dative, singular
τῶν	of the	Article, genitive, plural
αὐτῶν	same	Personal pronoun, genitive, plural
παθημάτων	sufferings	Noun, genitive, plural
ὧν	that	Relative pronoun, genitive, plural
καὶ	also	Conjunction
ἡμεῖς	we ourselves	Personal pronoun, first person, nominative
πάσχομεν,	suffer,	Verb, present, active

	Reference	Text (BSB)
1	2 Corinthians 1:4	who comforts us in all our troubles, so that we can comfort those in any trouble with the comfort we ourselves have received from God.
2	2 Corinthians 4:15–18	All this is for your benefit, so that the grace that is extending to more and more people may overflow in thanksgiving, to the glory of God.
3	1 Corinthians 3:21–23	Therefore, stop boasting in men. All things are yours,
4	2 Timothy 2:10	For this reason I endure all things for the sake of the elect, so that they too may obtain the salvation that is in Christ Jesus, with eternal glory.
5	Acts 21:5	But when our time there had ended, we set out on our journey. All the disciples, with their wives and children, accompanied us out of the city and knelt down on the beach to pray with us.

Word	Editions carrying it	Missing from
εἴτε if	NA28, NA27, SBL, WH	Treg, Tyn, TR, Byz
παρακαλούμεθα, we are encouraged,	NA28, NA27, SBL, WH	Treg, Tyn, TR, Byz
ὑπὲρ [it is] for	NA28, NA27, SBL, WH	Treg, Tyn, TR, Byz
τῆς <the>	NA28, NA27, SBL, WH	Treg, Tyn, TR, Byz
ὑμῶν your	NA28, NA27, SBL, WH	Treg, Tyn, TR, Byz
παρακλήσεως comfort	NA28, NA27, SBL, WH	Treg, Tyn, TR, Byz
και and		NA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn, TR, Byz
σωτηριας salvation		NA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn, TR, Byz

“If however we are constricted, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation if we are encouraged, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation which is operating in [the] endurance of the same sufferings that also we ourselves suffer,”

εἴτεeite If G1535 Conjunction ¶

65× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 2 Corinthians than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This word means 'whether' or 'if', used in conditions and questions, like in Matthew 11:14 and Romans 8:25. It helps us understand choices and possibilities in the Bible.

Tyndale gloss

whether

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word εἴτε (i.e., *eite*) means 'whether' or 'either...or...' and is often used to present alternatives. It is derived from two roots and appears in various contexts, including indirect questions. In the New Testament, it is found 65 times, notably in Romans and Corinthians, indicating its role in expressing choices or conditions.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἴτε, v.s. εἰ.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἴτε (eite) — whether.

εἴτε,

Doric dialect αἴτε, generally doubled, εἴτε..εἴτε.., Latin sive..sive.., either..or.., whether..or.., so that two cases are put as equally possible or equivalent; thrice repeated, [Refs 5th c.BC+] is sometimes omitted in Poets, ξεῖνος, αἴτ᾽ ὦν ἀστός [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and even in Prose, πόλις, εἴτε ἰδιῶται [Refs 5th c.BC+] Latin utrum..an.., variant in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; sometimes ἤ (ἠὲ καί.. variant in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἴτε.. εἴτε.., with subjunctive (compare εἰ), variant in [Refs 4th c.BC+]

II. in indirect questions, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἴτε

eite

from 1487 and 5037; if too:--if, or, whether.

see GREEK for 1487

see GREEK for 5037

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἴτε

Cj.

and if, whether

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

εἴτε eite 65x

whether, Rom. 12:6, 7, 8; 1 Cor. 3:22; 2 Cor. 1:6; 1 Thess. 5:10

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἴτε εἰ, τε generally doubled, εἴτε . . , εἴτε Lat. sive . . , sive, either . . , or . . , whether . . , or . . the first εἴτε is sometimes omitted in Poets:—the first εἴτε is sometimes replaced by εἰ, as εἰ . . , εἴτε . . , Hdt., Trag.

also used, like εἰ, in indirect questions, Od., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

51%or

or51% · 33×whether32% · 21×if15% · 10×other renderings2% · 1×

65 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject31%adverbial15%object6%predicate3%verb3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 65 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ζωήlife

εἴτεand if, whetherδιά

θεόςGod, a god

λέγωI say, speakἐξίστημιI astonish, am a

δοῦλος (II)

εἴτεand if, whether

ἐγώ

οὖνtherefore, thenσῶμαbody, flesh

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

παράὁArticle the

εἴτεIf65×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

διδάσκωI teachπαρακαλέωI summon, entreaἐπί

διά

ζωήlifeθάνατοςdeathλόγοςa word, speech,

ἐν

σῶμαbody, fleshοὐρανόςthe sky, the hea

οὖνtherefore, then

ἐσθίωI eatἐγώ

δοῦλος (II)

εἴτεand if, whether

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἴτε · 65× in the New Testament

1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Colossians Philippians Romans 1 Peter 1 Thessalonians 2 Thessalonians Ephesians

Across the New Testament9 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

εἴτεand if, whether×διά×σῶμαbody, flesh×ζωήlife×θάνατοςdeath×δοῦλος (II)×ἈπολλῶςApollos×ΚηφᾶςCephas×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus Ignatius of Antioch Polycarp The Shepherd of Hermas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 140c. AD 40

ὥσπερ γὰρ τὸ ἀκμάζον αἰεὶ τοῦ παρηβηκότος βέλτιόν ἐστιν, εἴτε ζῷον εἴτε φυτὸν εἴτε καρπὸς εἴτ’ ἄλλο τι τῶν ἐν τῇ φύσει τυγχάνοι, οὕτως ἔοικεν ὁ μὲν πρῶτος διαπλασθεὶς ἄνθρωπος ἀκμὴ τοῦ ἡμετέρου παντὸς ὑπάρξαι γένους, οἱ δ’ ἔπειτα μηκέθ’ ὁμοίως…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.47c. AD 75–95

εἴτε γὰρ δευτέραν δέησιν ἐξεδέχετο, ταύτην γεγονέναι καὶ μετὰ πλείονος σπουδῆς·

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 9.1.10c. AD 140

διὰ τοῦτο προσετάγη ὑμῖν ἐφ̓ ἑαυτοῖς μένειν, εἴτε ἀνὴρ εἴτε γυνή: δύναται γὰρ ἐν τοῖς τοιούτοις μετάνοια εἶναι.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

6th c. AD 4th c. AD 5th c. AD 7th c. AD 3rd c. BC

P.Stras. 6 504Kerkesucha bzw. Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 106

Ἀμμωνίου πέπρακα ὡς πρόκειται Στοτοῆτις Στοτοήτιος ἠγόρακα καθὼς πρόκειται Ἀ … ι γρα Κερκεσούχων ειτε … … … ερ

APF 6 (1920), p. 85Ptolemais Euergetis (Arsinoites)AD 120–AD 121

πράγματος ὑπερτεθέντος εἰς τὴν μείζονα ἐξουσίαν συνέβη, καθὼς ἅπαντες προφέρονται, καὶ αὐτὸ τὸ παιδίον, εἴτε ἦν τῆς Ἀπίας τῆς καὶ Ἡρακλείας εἴτε ἀλλότριον, τελευτῆσαι, τὰ νῦν εἰς διάλυσιν ἀγείοχαν

P.Bodl. 1 31Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 169–AD 176

εἰπεῖν π … ε … … τοῦ ἐπιστρατήγου … ε … ο … … εἴτε δικαστοῦ. εὐδοκῶ πᾶσι τοῖς ὑπὸ σοῦ ἐπιτελεσθησομένοις. Τὸ χειρόγραφον τοῦτο κύριον ἔστω πανταχῇ ὡς

“If however we are constricted, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation if we are encouraged, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation which is operating in [the] endurance of the same sufferings that also we ourselves suffer,”

δὲde however G1161 Conjunction ¶

2,787× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in 2 Corinthians as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This is a conjunction that means and, but, or then, used to connect ideas like in Matthew 1:2 and 2 Corinthians 6:15.

Tyndale gloss

then

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δέ (de) is a post-positive particle in Greek, primarily used as a conjunction to connect clauses. It can express contrast (but, on the other hand) or continuation (and, also), and is often used to transition between ideas or to add emphasis. In the New Testament, it appears frequently in various contexts, such as contrasting statements or resuming interrupted discourse, with notable examples in Matthew and 2 Corinthians.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δέ (before vowels δ’; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, v. WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96),

post-positive conjunctive particle;

copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mt 1:2ff., II Co 6:15, 16, II Pe 1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Ro 3:21, 22, 9:30, I Co 2:6, Ga 2:2, Phl 2:8; in transition to something new, Mt 1:18 2:19, Lk 13:1, Jo 7:14, Ac 6:1, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δέ (related to δή, as μέν to μήν, ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 355), a particle adversative, distinctive, disjunctive, but, moreover, (W.§ 53, 7 and 10, 2); it is much more freq. in the historical parts of the N. T. than in the other books, very rare in the Epp. of John and the Apocalypse. {On its general neglect of elision (when the next word begins with a vowel) cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; WH. App. Ῥ 146; W.§5,1a.; B. p.10sq.] It is used ἘΠ ΟἹ δὲ univ. by way of opposition and distinction; it is added to statements opp. to a preceding statement: ἐὰν yap ἀφῆτε... ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε, Mt. vi. 14 sq.; ἐὰν de ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς κτλ. Mt. vi. 23; ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι, Mk. ii. 20; it opposes persons to persons or things previously mentioned or thought of, —either with strong emphasis: ἐγὼ δέ, Mt. v. 22, 28, 32, 34, 39,44; ἡμεῖς de, 1 Co. i. 23; 2 Co. x. 13; σὺ δέ, Mt. vi. 6; ὑμεῖς δέ, Mk. viii. 29; of δὲ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δεῖ. For the conjunctive, as in Mt 26%, cf. P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) ἐάν σε δῇ (for δέῃ) τὸ εἱμάτιόν σου θεῖναι ἐνέχυρον. “even if you have to pawn your cloak” (Edd.). In P Tebt I. 585° (B.c. 111) we have ἐάν followed by the indicative— ἐὰν δεῖ σε συνπεσεῖν τῶι ᾿Ανικήτωι, σύνπεσαι, ‘if you must meet Anicetus, meet him” (Edd.): cf. Mayser G7. p. 325. Other examples of the verb are l’ Par 461® (B.C. 153) διὸ Kal ἡγούμενος δεῖν ἐπ᾿ ἄλλου μὲν μηθενὸς αὐτῶι διακριθῆναι» P Lille I. 267 (iii.B.c.) περὶ (corr. from πεερὶ) δὲ τούτου τοῦ μέρους δεήσει ἐπισχεῖν, P Tebt 11. 3414 (A.p. 140-1) δεήσι ἐπισταλῆναι εἰς δάνε[ι]α σπέρματα κατασπίο]ρᾶς KTA., “ΕἼ will be necessary to send on account of loans of seedcorn for the sowing,” etc., AécheZ 1001" © (Theran Doric —c. B.C. 200) no one may bring forward a proposal ὡς δεείσῃ διαλῦσαι τὸ κοινὸν εἰ τὰς θυσίας, P Flor II. 133" (A.D. 257) ἔδι μὲν ὑμᾶς μηδὲ…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δέ (de) — then.

δέ,

but: adversative and copulative Particle,

I. answering to μέν (which see), τὴν νῦν μὲν Βοιωτίαν, πρότερον δὲ Καδμηίδα γῆν καλουμένην [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. without preceding μέν,

II.1. adversative, expressing distinct opposition, αἰεί τοι τὰ κάκ᾽ ἐστὶ φίλα.. μαντεύεσθαι, ἐσθλὸν δ᾽ οὔτε τί πω εἶπας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in Prose, οὐκ ἐπὶ κακῷ, ἐλευθερώσει δέ.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. copulative,

II.2. a in explanatory clauses, ξυνέβησαν.. τὰ μακρὰ τείχη ἑλεῖν (ἦν δὲ σταδίων μάλιστα ὀκτώ) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: when a substantive is followed by words in apposition, Ἀρισταγόρῃ τῷ Μιλησίῳ, δούλῳ δὲ ἡμετέρῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in answers, διπλᾶ λέγειν. —Answ. διπλᾶδ᾽ ὁρᾶν…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

δέ

de

a primary particle (adversative or continuative); but, and,

etc.:--also, and, but, moreover, now (often unexpressed in English).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δέ

Cj.

but, on the other hand, and

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δέ de 2x

a conjunctive particle, marking the superaddition of a clause, whether in opposition or in continuation, to what has preceded, and it may be variously rendered but, on the other hand, and, also, now, etc.; καὶ δέ, when there is a special superaddition in continuation, too, yea, etc. It sometimes is found at the commencement of the apodosis of a sentence, Acts 11:17. It serves also to mark the resumption of an interrupted discourse, 2 Cor. 2:10; Gal. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δέ but: conjunctive Particle, with adversative force: it commonly answers to μέν, and may often be rendered by while, whereas, on the other hand, v. μέν:— but μέν is often omitted, δέ being used merely to pass on from one thing to another; ὣς Ἀχιλεὺς θάμβησεν, θάμβησαν δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι Il.; etc.; κινεῖ κραδίην κινεῖ δὲ χόλον Eur.

δέ is often redundant,

to introduce the apodosis, where it may be rendered by then, yet, εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they will not give it, then I will take it, Il.; so at in Lat., si tu oblitus es, at Dii meminerint Catull.

to resume after interruption caused by a parenthesis, where it may be rendered by I say, now, so then, Hdt.

POSITION of δέ: properly second, being often put between the Art. and Subst., the prep. and case.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

33%now

now33% · 974×however27% · 780×then21% · 620×and12% · 360×but5% · 154×other renderings2% · 49×

2,937 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,787 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existσύ

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςκύριοςlord, Lord, mastπεντακισχίλιοιfive thousand

εἰCond

παλαιόςold, ancient, woσύεἰμίI am, exist

εἰμίI am, exist

περιπατέωI walk, conduct ἀναπίπτωI lie down, reclμνημεῖονa tomb, sepulche

οὗτος

δίδωμιI offer, giveθεόςGod, a godπίστιςfaith, belief, t

δέhowever2787×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἸησοῦςJesusθεόςGod, a godκύριοςlord, Lord, mast

αὐτός

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐπί

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςὁArticle theσύ

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theοὗτοςἸωάννηςJohn

τὶς

ὁArticle theαὐτόςὄνομαname, character,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδέ · 2,787× in the New Testament

Acts Luke Matthew 1 Corinthians John Mark Romans 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians James 1 Timothy

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

“If however we are constricted, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation if we are encouraged, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation which is operating in [the] endurance of the same sufferings that also we ourselves suffer,”

θλιβόμεθα,thlibō we are constricted, G2346 Verb · present · passive · indicative · first person · plural ¶

10× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 2 Corinthians than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

To press on or crowd, like a narrow way in Matthew 7:14. It can also mean to oppress or afflict, as in 2 Thessalonians 1:6, where God will trouble those who trouble His people.

Amplified meaning

suffering, troubled, or oppressed

Tyndale gloss

to press on

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word θλίβω (i.e., *thlibō*) means to press, squeeze, or compress, and it can also refer to afflicting or distressing someone. It appears in various contexts, including the New Testament, where it is used metaphorically to describe oppression and tribulation. The word is built from a root related to pressing and encompasses both literal and figurative senses of pressure.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

θλίβω,

[in LXX chiefly (ὁ θλίβων) for צוּר;]

to press: c. acc. pers., Mk 3:9; ὁδὸς τεθλιμμένη, a narrow (compressed) way, Mt 7:14. Metaph. (as freq. in LXX), to oppress, afflict, distress: c. acc. pers., II Th 1:6; pass. (Vg., tribulor, tribulationem patior), II Co 1:6 4:8 7:5, I Th 3:4, II Th 1:7, I Ti 5:10, He 11:37 (cf. ἀπο-, συν-θλίβω).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

θλίβω; Pass., pres. θλίβομαι; pf. ptep. τεθλιμμένος ; [allied with flagrum, affliction; fr. Hom. down]; to press (as grapes), press hard upon: prop. twa [A. V. throng], Mk. iii. 9; ὁδὸς τεθλιμμένη a compressed way, i. 6. narrow, straitened, contracted, Mt. vii. 14; metaph. fo trouble, afflict, distress, (Vulg. tribulo): τινά, 2 ΤῊ. 1. 6; pass. (Vulg. tribulor, [also angustior]; tribulationem patior) : 2Co.i. 6; iv. 8; vii. 5; [1 Th. iii. 4; 2Th.i.7]; 1 Tim. v. 10; Heb. xi. 37. (of θλίβοντες for O°¥ in Sept.) [Comp. : dzo-, συν-θλίβω.}

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

θλίβω. The varied usage of this common verb may be illustrated by the following passages—P Petr II. 4 (1)? (B.c. 255-4) ἵνα μὴ ἡμεῖς θλιβώμεθα, P Par 26% (B.c. 163-2) (= Selections, Ὁ. 15) ἡμῶν δὲ τοῖς δέουσι θλιβομένων, P Oxy VI. 898%9 (A.D. 123) ἐκ παντὸς θλείβουσά pe εἰς τὸ μὴ δύνασθαι κατ᾽ αὐτῆς προελθεῖν, ‘using every means of oppressing me so as to render me incapable of proceeding against her (Edd.), P Ryl IT. 116% (a.p. 194) θλειβομένη τῇ συνειδήσει περὶ av ἐνοσφίσατο κτλ., of a woman ‘‘oppressed by the consciousness” that she had wrongfully appropriated certain articles, P Tebt II. 4235 (early iii/A.p.) περὶ τῶν βοῶν μὴ ἀμελὴς (/. ἀμελήσῃς) μηδὲ θλεῖβε αὐτά, ‘do not neglect the oxen or work them hard” (Edd.), P Oxy I. 1238 (iti/iv A.D.)…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

θλίβω (thlibō) — to press on.

θλῐβ-ω [ῑ],

[Refs 5th c.BC+]future θλίψω (ἀπο-) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἔθλιψα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect τέθλῐφα [Refs 4th c.BC+] —middle, future θλίψομαι (see. below):—passive, future θλῐβήσομαι variant in [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: aorist 1 ἐθλίφθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist 2 participle θλῐβείς[Refs 1st c.AD+] (compare subjunctive ἐκφλῐβῇ [Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect τέθλιμμαι [Refs 4th c.BC+]:— squeeze, chafe, θλίβει τὸν ὄρρον [ὁ θώραξ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὅπου με θλίβει where [the shoe] pinches, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]: absolutely, exercise pressure, [Refs 3rd c.AD+]:—passive, of a person heavy-laden, ὡς θλίβομαι! [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—middle, πολλῇς φλιῇσι παραστὰς θλίψεται (variant{φλίψεται}) ὤμους he will rub his shoulders against many doorposts, of a beggar, [Refs 8th…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

θλίβω

thlibo

akin to the base of 5147; to crowd (literally or

figuratively):--afflict, narrow, throng, suffer tribulation, trouble.

see GREEK for 5147

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

θλίβω

v.

I make narrow, persecute, press hard

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

θλίβω thlibō 10x

to squeeze, press; to press upon, encumber, throng, crowd, Mk. 3:9; met. to distress, afflict, 2 Cor. 1:6; 4:8; pass. to be compressed, narrow, Mt. 7:14

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

θλίβω to press, squeeze, pinch, Ar., Dem.:—Pass. of a person heavy-laden, ὡς θλίβομαι! Ar.:—Mid., πολλῆισι φλιῆισι θλίψεται ὤμους he will rub his shoulders against many doorposts, of a beggar, Od.

to pinch, compress, straiten, Plat.:—Pass. to be compressed, θλιβομένα καλύβα a small, close hut, Theocr.; ὁδὸς τεθλιμμένη a narrow way, NTest.

metaph. to oppress, afflict, distress, Arist.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Verb-PPI-1P — Verb · present · passive · indicative · first person · plural
present passive indicative — an action in progress.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PPI-1P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Passive Mood: Indicative Person: first Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

20%being oppressed

being oppressed20% · 2×we are constricted10% · 1×being hard pressed10% · 1×we are being pressed10% · 1×suffer affliction10% · 1×oppressing10% · 1×those being oppressed10% · 1×compressed10% · 1×other renderings10% · 1×

10 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

verb70%object20%predicate10%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 10 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

πᾶςall, the whole, ever

ἐν

ὁArticle the

ἀνταποδίδωμιI give in returnσύ

καίand, even, also, nam

πύληa door, gate

μήNeg

ἵναin order that, s

δέbut, on the other ha

εἴτεand if, whether

θλίβωwe are constricted,10×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ὁδόςa way, road, jou

αὐτός

ὑπέρ

ὁArticle the

ἀλλάbut, except

οὐNeg

ἔξωθενfrom without, outsid

μάχηstrife, contenti

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceθλίβω · 10× in the New Testament

2 Corinthians 2 Thessalonians 1 Thessalonians 1 Timothy Hebrews Matthew Mark

Across the New Testament7 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

πᾶςall, the whole, every kind of×ἀλλάbut, except×εἰCond×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas

Philo of AlexandriaOn Joseph 179c. AD 40

φιλεῖ γὰρ ἐν ταῖς ἀναπαύλαις τῶν σωμάτων ἐναργεστέρας τῶν ἀβουλήτων ἡ διάνοια λαμβάνουσα φαντασίας χαλεπῶς ἄγαν θλίβεσθαι καὶ πιέζεσθαι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 20.111c. AD 75–95

παραγενομένους δὲ τοὺς στρατιώτας θεασάμενον τὸ πλῆθος καὶ φοβηθὲν φεύγειν ὥρμησεν, τῶν δʼ ἐξόδων στενῶν οὐσῶν διώκεσθαι νομίζοντες ὑπὸ τῶν πολεμίων καὶ συνωθούμενοι κατὰ τὴν φυγὴν πολλοὺς ἀλλήλοις ἐν τοῖς στενοῖς θλιβόμενοι διέφθειρον.

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 7.1.5c. AD 140

οἱ οὖν λαμβάνοντες ἀποδώσουσιν λόγον τῷ θεῷ, διατί ἔλαβον καὶ εἰς τί: οἱ μὲν γὰρ λαμβάνοντες θλιβόμενοι οὐ δικασθήσονται, οἱ δὲ ἐν ὑποκρίσει λαμβάνοντες τίσουσιν δίκην.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

4th c. AD 2nd c. AD 2nd c. BC

P.Paris p. 208-209 no. 12Memphis158 BC

κωλύειν με, ἐὰν βούλωμαι ἐπανάγειν εἰς τὴν κώμην διὰ τὸ χωλὸν ὄντα τοῖς ἀναγκαίοις θλίβεσθαι, ὅπως μὴ ὑπὸ τῆς λιμοῦ διαλυθῶ. τούτου γὰρ γενομένου ἔσομαι τετευχὼς τῆς παρά σου

P.Bagnall 12Xeron PelagosAD 115–AD 130

παρακληθεὶς δέ, ὅ τι ἂν εὕρῃς παρὰ σοί, ἀγόρασόν μοι καὶ πέμψον διὰ τὸ θλίβεσθαι ἡμᾶς ἐνθάδε · οὐ γὰρ ἔστιν κονδούκτωρ. ἀσπάζου Κόμωνα πολλὰ καὶ μετάδος αὐτῷ μή

P.Lond. 6 1914Herakleopolites bzw. KynopolitesAD 335

ἀδελφὸς οὐκ ἔστιν εἰ μὴ οὗτοι οἱ δύο ὑποδέχομενοι τοὺς ἀδελφούς· ἐποίησαν αὐτοὺς δειλανθῆναι. θλιβόμεθα οὖν πάνυ διειργμένοι ὑπὸ αὐτῶν κατὰ τόπον. ἐπιλυπούμεθα οὖν ὅτι οὐκ ἐπιτρέπουσιν ἡμῖν πρὸς

“If however we are constricted, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation if we are encouraged, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation which is operating in [the] endurance of the same sufferings that also we ourselves suffer,”

ὑπὲρ [it is] for G5228 ¶

154× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 2 Corinthians than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Above or for something, often used to describe doing something for someone's benefit. In Matthew 5:44 and Romans 10:1, it means praying for or on behalf of others.

Tyndale gloss

above/for

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὑπέρ (transliterated as *huper*) is a preposition meaning 'over' or 'above' when used with the genitive case, and it can imply 'for' or 'on behalf of' in various contexts. It appears frequently in the New Testament, particularly in discussions of Christ's sacrificial death, such as in Matthew 5:44 and Romans 5:6-8. The word can also express excess or superiority when used with the accusative case.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — ὑπέρ, ἀντι from a scan

Ir has been often claimed, and in the interests of an all-important truth, namely the vicarious character of the sacrifice of the death of Christ, that in such passages as Met. 4i;-93 Tit. i. 14: 1 Tim. 11. 6; Gal. 111: 13+ Luke REM 19, 203 1 Pet. 11. 21: 11.133 iv.1; Rom. v.38; John x. 15, in all of which Christ is said to have died ὑπὲρ πάντων, UTEP ἡμῶν, ὑπὲρ τῶν προβάτων, and the like, ὑπέρ shall be accepted as equipollent with ἀντί. And then, it is further urged that, as ἀντί is the preposition first of equivalence (Homer, Jl. ix. 116, 117) and then of exchange (1 Cor. xi. 15; Heb. xii. 2, 16; Matt. v. 38), ὑπέρ must in all those passages be regarded as having the same force. Each of these, it is evident, would thus become a dictum probans for a truth, in itself most vital, namely that Christ suffered, not merely on our behalf and for our good, but also in our stead, and bearing…

Read the full entry →

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὑπέρ (when following subst.—poët.—ὕπερ; so as adv., II Co 11:23),

prep. c. gen., acc.

C. gen., primarily of place (rest or motion), over, above, across, beyond, hence, metaph.,

for, on behalf of: of prayer, Mt 5:44, Ac 8:24, Ro 10:1, Ja 5:16, al.; of laying down life, Jo 10:11, Ro 9:3, al.; esp. of Christ giving his life for man's redemption, Mk 14:24, Jo 10:15, Ac 21:13, Ro 5:6-8, al.; opp. to κατά,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἁμαρτίαν ἐποίησεν (μὴ γνόντα is said agreeably to the judgment of ὁ ποιήσας), 2 Co. ν. 21 (τὸν οὐ γνόντα would be equiv. to ἀγνοοῦντα). in predictions, where it expresses the opinion of those who predict: ἔσῃ σιωπῶν καὶ μὴ δυνάμενος λαλῆσαι, Lk. i. 20; ἔσῃ τυφλὸς μὴ βλέπων, Acts xiii. 11. where the writer or speaker does ποῦ regard the thing itself so much as the thought of the thing, which he wishes to remove from the mind of the reader or hearer (Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 666), — to be rendered without ete. (Germ. ohne zu with inf.) [ef. B. § 148, 7 b.]: ἐξῆλθε μὴ ἐπιστάμενος, ποῦ ἔρχεται, Heb. xi. 8; add, Mt. xxii. 12; Lk. xiii. 11 [(but ef. B. § 148, 7¢.)]; Acts v. 7; xx. 22; Heb.ix.9. where the participles have a conditional, causal, or concessive force, and may be resolved into clauses introduced by if, on condition that, etc. : θερίσομεν μὴ ἐκλυόμενοι, Gal. vi. 9; μὴ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὑπέρ. From its original locative meaning ‘‘ over” (as in P Par 1145 (B.C. 117) τὰ μὲν ὑπὲρ [γῆς], ταῦθ᾽ ὑπὸ γῆς), ὑπέρ came to be applied in a variety of ways. I. c. gen. (a) = ‘‘for,” ‘‘on behalf of,” ‘‘in the place of”: P Tebt I. 6% (B.c, 140-139) ἐπιτ]ελεῖν τὰ νομιζόμενα τοῖς θεοῖς ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν Kal τῶν τ[έκ]νων, ‘to pay the customary offerings to the gods on behalf of us and our children” (Edd.), P Oxy IV. 743°° (B.c. 2) συνπροσγενέσθαι αὐτῶι ὡς ἀνθομολογη(σομένῳ᾽ ὑπέρ cov οὕτως ὡς ὑπίέρ) pov, ‘‘stand by him, as he will agree in everything for you just as for me”’ (Edd.), and BGU I. 246} (ii/iii a..) γυκτὸς Kal ἡμέρας ἐντυνχάνω TO θεῷ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν. Cf. also crane, ὑπερ with Mk 9*° the Christian P Iand I. 168 (v/vi A.D.) τὸ νόμιμον ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἐστιν, and with 1 Cor 152% A/iche/ 1001: 10 (will of Epicteta—c. B.C. 200) τοῦ kal κατασκεναξαμένου τὸ μουσεῖον ὑπὲρ τοῦ μεταλλαχότος ἁμῶν υἱοῦ…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὑπέρ (huper) — above/for.

ὑπέρ [ῠ],

Epic dialect also ὑπείρ, used by [Refs 8th c.BC+] ὁπέρ (which see): in Aeolic dialect replaced by περί (see. περί [Refs 4th c.BC+] also dative (Cf. Sanskrit upaári 'above', Gothic ufar, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] ofer 'over':—from it are formed the comparative and superlative ὑπέρτερος, -τατος, also adverb ὕπερθεν, and Nouns ὑπέρα, ὕπερος.)

__A WITH GENIT.,

__A.I of Place, over;

__A.I.1 in a state of rest, over, above, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; χιτωνίσκους ἐνεδεδύκεσαν ὑ. γονάτων not reaching to the knees, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; στῆ δ᾽ ἄρ᾽ ὑ. κεφαλῆς stood over his head as he lay asleep, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὑ. κεφαλῆς οἱ ἐγίνετο διεξελαύνοντι over head, i. e. over the gateway, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ὑ. κεφαλῆς the higher ground, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἰονίας ὑ. ἁλὸς οἰκέων on the Ionian sea…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὑπέρ

huper

a primary preposition; "over", i.e. (with the genitive case) of place,

above, beyond, across, or causal, for the sake of, instead, regarding;

with the accusative case superior to, more than:--(+ exceeding,

abundantly) above, in (on) behalf of, beyond, by, + very chiefest,

concerning, exceeding (above, -ly), for, + very highly, more (than),

of, over, on the part of, for sake of, in stead, than, to(-ward),

very. In the comparative, it retains many of the above applications.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὑπέρ

Prep.

in behalf of, above

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὑπέρ hyper 150x

(1) gen., above, over; met. in behalf of, Mt. 5:44; Mk. 9:40; Jn. 17:19; instead of beneficially, Phlm. 13; in maintenance of, Rom. 15:8; for the furtherance of, Jn. 11:4; 2 Cor. 1:6, 8; for the realization of, Phil. 2:13; equivalent to περί, about, concerning, with the further signification of interest or concern in the subject, Acts 5:41; Rom. 9:27; Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὑπέρ over, above, w. gen, over, beyond, w. acc.

Lat. super:—hence are formed comp. and Sup. ὑπέρτερος, -τατος.

WITH GENIT.,

of Place, over, above:

in a state of rest, στέρνον ὑπὲρ μαζοῖο Il.; ὑπὲρ κεφαλῆς στῆναί τινι to stand over his head, Hom.: of countries, above, further inland, οἰκέοντες ὑπὲρ Ἁλικαρνησσοῦ μεσόγαιαν Hdt.

in a state of motion, over, across, ὑπὲρ θαλάσσης καὶ χθονὸς ποτωμένοις Aesch.

over, beyond, ὑπὲρ πόντου Od.

metaph., from the notion of standing over to protect, for, for defence of, in behalf of, ἑκατόμβην ῥέξαι ὑπὲρ Δαναῶν Il.; θύειν ὑπὲρ τῆς πόλεως Xen.; ὑπὲρ τῆς πατρίδος ἀμύνειν to fight for one's country, etc.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

—

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

for (ki (conjunction), le, from 'el (preposition), and various other words. In the New Testament also the words are various, chiefly gar, kai gar, hoti (conjunctions); anti apo eis dia (accusative), epi (dative and accusative), peri (genitive), pros (genitive and accusative), huper (genitive) (prepositions)): the English Revised Version and the American Standard Revised Version give in many cases more literal or more accurate renderings than those in the King James Version.

In the New Testament the most important preps. from a doctrinal point of view are anti, "face to face," "over against," "instead," "on behalf of," peri, "around," "about," "concerning," huper, "over," "on behalf of." The first has been claimed as stating the substitutionary nature of Christ's sacrifice as contrasted with huper and peri, more frequently used of it. But, although anti in the New Testament often means…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

65%for

for65% · 102×above7% · 11×on behalf of5% · 8×concerning5% · 8×beyond3% · 5×about3% · 5×on behalf3% · 4×other renderings4% · 6×other renderings6% · 9×

158 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 17 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial87%predicate8%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 154 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

ἐγώὑστερέωI am lacking, faσῶμαbody, flesh

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theχάριςgrace, favor, ki

ἐγώ

κατάψυχήthe soul, life, θλῖψιςpersecution, aff

σύ

κατάψυχήthe soul, life, δέομαιI request, beg

ἀποθνῄσκωI am dying, am about

ἄνθρωποςa man, one of thἸησοῦςJesusτὶς

ὑπέρ[it is] for154×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ὄνομαname, character,ψυχήthe soul, life, σύ

ἐγώ

πρόςἵναin order that, sοὐNeg

σύ

καίand, even, also,καυχάομαιI boast, gloryἐν

πᾶςall, the whole, ever

ἀποθνῄσκωI am dying, am aὁArticle theσύ

ὅς

ἐγώΧριστόςanointed, the MeγράφωI write

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὑπέρ · 154× in the New Testament

2 Corinthians Romans John Ephesians Hebrews 1 Corinthians Acts Colossians Philippians Luke Matthew Galatians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament22 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἀποθνῄσκωI am dying, am about to die×ψυχήthe soul, life, self×ὄνομαname, character, reputation×ἁμαρτίαa sin×τίθημιI put, place×ἔθνοςa race, people, the Gentiles×παραδίδωμιI hand over, deliver, betray×εὐχαριστέωI thank, give thanks×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 5c. AD 40

οὐ μὴν διὰ τοῦθ’ ἡσυχαστέον, ἀλλ’ ἕνεκα τοῦ θεοφιλοῦς καὶ ὑπὲρ δύναμιν ἐπιτολμητέον λέγειν, οἴκοθεν μὲν οὐδέν, ὀλίγα δ’ ἀντὶ πολλῶν, ἐφ’ ἃ τὴν ἀνθρωπίνην διάνοιαν φθάνειν εἰκὸς ἔρωτι καὶ πόθῳ σοφίας κατεσχημένην.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.70c. AD 75–95

ὑπὲρ δὲ τοῦ μὴ διαφυγεῖν τοὺς ἀνθρώπους τὰ ηὑρημένα μηδὲ πρὶν εἰς γνῶσιν ἐλθεῖν φθαρῆναι, προειρηκότος ἀφανισμὸν Ἀδάμου τῶν ὅλων ἔσεσθαι τὸν μὲν κατʼ ἰσχὺν πυρὸς τὸν ἕτερον δὲ κατὰ βίαν καὶ πλῆθος ὕδατος, στήλας δύο ποιησάμενοι τὴν μὲν ἐκ πλίνθου…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν Πτολεμαίδι.

P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

τριακοσίων · καὶ μὴ ἐπελεύσεσθαι μήτʼ αὐτὸν Ψενενοῦπιν ἐπὶ τὸν Ἁρσιῆσιν μήτʼ ἄλλον μηδένα ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ περὶ τοῦ διασαφουμένου μέρους γῆς τρόπῳ μηδενί. εἰ δὲ μή, ἀποτεισάτω Ἁρσιήσει ἐπίτιμον

P.Adl. 14Pathyris101 BC

μοι ἄπρατον γῆς ἀρουρῶν γ, καὶ μὴ ἐπελεύσεσθαι μήτʼ αὐτὸν Κολλούθην μήδʼ ἄλλον μηδένα ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τὸν Ὧρον μήδʼ ἐπʼ ἄλλον μηδένα τῶν παρʼ αὐτοῦ περὶ τῶν ἀρουρῶν

“If however we are constricted, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation if we are encouraged, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation which is operating in [the] endurance of the same sufferings that also we ourselves suffer,”

τῆς <the> G3588 ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in 2 Corinthians as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

—

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁ<the>19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“If however we are constricted, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation if we are encouraged, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation which is operating in [the] endurance of the same sufferings that also we ourselves suffer,”

ὑμῶν your G4771 ¶

2,892× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 2 Corinthians than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This Greek word means 'you' and is used to address someone directly, like in John 1:30 and Matthew 26:64. It's a way to emphasize or contrast the person being spoken to. The KJV Bible translates it as 'thou'.

Tyndale gloss

you

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σύ is the second-person singular pronoun meaning 'you' in Greek. It has various forms: genitive σοῦ, dative σοί, and accusative σέ. The word can be used for emphasis or contrast, particularly in the New Testament, as seen in verses like Matthew 26:64. It also appears in various dialects and has enclitic forms.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σύ,

pron. of 2nd pers.,

thou, you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mt 25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jo 1:30, 42 4:10 5:33, 39, 44, Ac 4:7, Eph 5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mt 26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mt 2:6, Lk 1:76, Jo 17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. (exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. [W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σύ (su) — you.

σύ [ῠ],

thou: pronoun of the second person:—Epic dialect nominative τύνη [ῡ] [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Laconian dialect τούνη [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect σύ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τύ [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τού [short syllable] [Refs 6th c.BC+] (also τούν [Refs]σύ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Gen. σοῦ, [Refs], elsewhere only Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enclitic σου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also in Lyric poetry, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (which also occurs in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and as enclitic σευ, [Refs 8th c.BC+], σεο (enclitic) [Refs] σευ (enclitic) [Refs]:—Doric dialect τεῦ, τευ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; rarely τέο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τεῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τεοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοι variant in [Refs]; enclitic τεος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; other Doric dialect forms are τίω, τίως, both [Refs 3rd c.BC+]—Dat. σοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

σύ

su

the person pronoun of the second person singular; thou:-- thou. See

also 4571, 4671, 4675; and for the plural 5209, 5210, 5213, 5216.

see GREEK for 4675

see GREEK for 4571

see GREEK for 4671

see GREEK for 5209

see GREEK for 5210

see GREEK for 5213

see GREEK for 5216

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ

Pers.pr.

you

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σύ sy 2x

you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, Mt. 1:20; 2:6

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

—

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

78%you

you78% · 2412×you yourselves7% · 221×you yourself5% · 168×your3% · 87×other renderings3% · 96×other renderings3% · 89×

3,073 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject28%object24%adverbial23%indirect object20%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,892 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

λέγωI say, speak

ἀμήνHebrδέbut, on the otheἐγώ

καίand, even, also, nam

ἐγώοὕτωthus, so, in thiμήNeg

ἐν

ὁArticle theεἰμίI am, existγίνομαιI come into bein

πρός

ἔρχομαιI come, goἐγώπέμπωI send

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakπαρακαλέωI summon, entreaθέλωI will, wish, de

σύyour2892×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

θεόςGod, a godἐνἁμαρτίαa sin

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theεἰρήνηpeace, peace of οὐNeg

ὅτιthat, since, because

ὁArticle theπᾶςall, the whole, οὐNeg

εἰμίI am, exist

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐν

ἐν

ὁArticle theποῖοςIrgΧριστόςanointed, the Me

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσύ · 2,892× in the New Testament

Matthew Luke John Acts Mark 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Romans 1 Thessalonians Revelation Hebrews Colossians

16 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἀμήνHebr×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

אַתָּ֫האָ֑תָּה pron. 2 s. m. thou H859b אתי, i.e. אתִּי, th66%H859 · 301 verses

Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.48c. AD 40

„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.101c. AD 75–95

παύσομαι δὲ τοῦ λοιποῦ μετὰ τοσαύτης ὀργῆς τὰς τιμωρίας ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀδικήμασιν εἰσπραττόμενος καὶ πολὺ μᾶλλον σοῦ παρακαλοῦντος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC

P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν

P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

η Φατρήους καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ

P.Grenf. 1 41Thebais3 BC

παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .

“If however we are constricted, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation if we are encouraged, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation which is operating in [the] endurance of the same sufferings that also we ourselves suffer,”

παρακλήσεως comfort G3874 ¶

29× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 2 Corinthians than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Encouragement is about giving comfort or solace to someone, like in 2 Corinthians 8:4. It's also about exhorting or urging someone to do something, as seen in Acts and other biblical passages.

Amplified meaning

consolation, encouragement

Tyndale gloss

encouragement

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word παράκλησις (paraklesis) is derived from παρακαλέω and encompasses meanings such as a calling for aid, exhortation, encouragement, and comfort. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, notably in passages like 2 Corinthians 1:4-7 and Romans 15:5. Some lexicons emphasize its use in both consolation and exhortation, reflecting its broad application in both personal and communal settings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

παρά-κλησις, -εως, ἡ

(< παρακαλέω),

[in LXX: Jb 21:2, Ps 93 (94):19, Ho 13:14, Na 3:7, Is 57:18 66:11, Je 16:7 (נחם, its parts and derivatives), Je 38 (31):9 (תַּחֲנוּן), Is 28:29 30:7, I Mac 10:24 12:9, II Mac 7:24 15:11*;]

a calling to one's aid, summons (Thus.), hence, appeal, entreaty (Strab., Plut., al., I Mac 10:24; cf. Lft., Notes, 20): II Co 8:4.

exhortation, encouragement: Ac 15:31, Ro 12:8, I Co 14:3, II Co 8:17, Phl 2:1, I Th 2:3,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

παρά-κλησις, -ews, 7), (παρακαλέω, α. V-) ; 1. prop. a calling near, summons, (esp. for help, Thue. 4, 61; Dem. p. 275, 20). 2. imploration, supplication, entreaty: 2 Co. viii. 4 (Strab. 13 p. 581; Joseph. antt. 3, 1,5; [e. Ap. 2, 23, 3 a. πρὸς τὸν θεὸν ἔστω] ; λόγοι παρακλήσεως, words of appeal, containing entreaties, 1 Mace. Tapakoyn x. 24). 3. exhortation, admonition, encouragement: Acts xv. 31 [al. refer this to 4]; 1 Co. xiv. 3; 2 Co. viii. 17; Phil. ii. 1; 1 Tim. iv. 13; Heb. xii. 5; λόγος τῆς παρακλήσεως, Heb. xiii. 22, (2 Mace. vii. 24; xv. 9 (11); Plat. def. 415 e.; Thue. 8, 92; Aeschin., Polyb., al.). 4. consolation, comfort, solace: 2 Co. i. 4-7; Heb. vi. 18; [add, Acts ix. 31; 2 Thess. ii. 16], (Jer. xvi. 7; Hos. xiii. 14; [Job xxi. 2; Nah. iii. 7]; Phalar. ep. 97 init.) ; τῶν γραφῶν, afforded by the contents of the Scriptures, Ro. xv. 4 [W. 189 (178)]; θεὸς τῆς παρακλ., God…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

παράκλησις. For the primary meaning “appeal,” ‘‘exhortation’’ (as in 1 Thess 28, 2 Cor δὴ) cf. P Grenf I. 321° (B.c. 102) δι[ὰ τ]ὰς ἡμῶν παρακλήσεις, with reference to the ‘appeals ” made to allow three soldiers to come to a certain spot, and P Tebt II. 3925 (A.D. 134-5) of the insertion of a name in an agreement of indemnity at the instance of others—ka[T]a παράκλησιν γέγραπται αὐτῶν. Seealso the late P Flor III. 323° (A.D. 525) δεή]σεις kal παρακλή[σ]εις προσ{ε]νήνοχά got, and from the inserr. Sy// 552 (= %695)** (after B.c. 129) κατευχὴν καὶ παράκλησιν παντὸς τοῦ πλήθους ποιεῖσθαι. On the semi-technical use οἵ παράκλησις in Lk 2535 with reference to the coming of the Messiah see Dalman Words, p- togf., and on the similar meaning ‘‘comfort’’ (not “invocation ’’ as Hort Ecclesta p. 55) in Ac 9951 see Swete Holy Spirit in the NT p. 96f. As against the derivation of BapvaBas — vids…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

παράκλησις (paraklēsis) — encouragement.

παρά-κλησις, εως, ἡ,

calling to one's aid, summons, οἱ ἐκ παρακλήσεως συγκαθήμενοι a packed party in the assembly, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

2. imploring, appealing, τινος of or on the part of one, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; deprecation, συγγνώμης δεῖ καὶ π. [Refs 1st c.BC+]

3. invocation of gods, [Refs 4th c.AD+]

4. demand, request, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; κατὰ-σιν on demand, [Refs 3rd c.AD+]

II. exhortation, address, πρὸς τὸν ὄχλον [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐ π. εὑρόντες, ἀλλὰ παραίνεσιν γράψαντες not a mere address to their feelings, but counsel to act rightly, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀξιώσεισκαὶ-κλήσεις [Refs 2nd c.BC+]

III. consolation, [LXX+NT+3rd c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

παράκλησις

paraklesis

from 3870; imploration, hortation, solace:--comfort, consolation,

exhortation, intreaty.

see GREEK for 3870

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

παράκλησις, εως, ἡ

n.f.

exhortation, entreaty, encouragement, comfort

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

παράκλησις paraklēsis 29x

a calling upon, exhortation, incitement, persuasion, Rom. 12:8; 1 Cor. 14:3; hortatory instruction, Acts 13:15; 15:31; entreaty, importunity, earnest supplication, 2 Cor. 8:4; solace, consolation, Lk. 2:25; Rom. 15:4, 5; 2 Cor. 1:3, 4, 5, 6, 7; cheering and supporting influence, Acts 9:31; joy, gladness, rejoicing, 2 Cor. 7:13; cheer, joy, enjoyment, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

παράκλησις παράκλησις, εως, παρακαλέω a calling to one's aid, summons, οἱ ἐκ παρακλήσεως συγκαθήμενοι a packed party in the jury, Dem.

a calling upon, appealing, τινος to one, Thuc.: intreaty, deprecation, Strab.

an exhortation, address, Thuc., Aeschin.: encouragement, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

—

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

kum'-fert (nacham; parakaleo): The New Testament word is variously translated, as "comfort," "exhort," "beseech," the exact translation to be determined by the context. Etymologically, it is "to call alongside of," i.e. to summon for assistance. To comfort is to cheer and encourage. It has a positive force wanting in its synonym "console," as it indicates the dispelling of grief by the impartation of strength. the Revised Version (British and American) has correctly changed the translation of paramutheomai from the King James Version "comfort," to "consolation." So in the Old Testament, "Comfort ye my people" (Isa 40:1) is much stronger than "console," which affords only the power of calm endurance of affliction, while the brightest hopes of the future and the highest incentives to present activity are the gifts of the Divine grace…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ See AFFLICTION, CONSOLATION IN

→ See RIGHTEOUS, PROMISES TO

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

38%comfort

comfort38% · 11×encouragement31% · 9×exhortation21% · 6×entreaty3% · 1×appeal3% · 1×consolation3% · 1×

29 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 6 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial45%object31%subject21%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 29 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

καίand, even, also,ἐνδιά

καίand, even, also, nam

οἰκοδομήthe act of buildἔχωI have, hold, po

σύ

ὁArticle the

προσδέχομαιI expect, welcome, a

εὐλαβήςcautious, pious

υἱόςa son, descendent

μεθερμηνεύωI translate, int

παράκλησιςcomfort29×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἸσραήλPropἅγιοςset apart, holy,μεταδίδωμιI share, impart

καίand, even, also, nam

παραμυθίαencouragement, cσωτηρίαdeliverance, salγάρfor

ἐγώ

περισσῶςCompοὐNeg

ὅς

παρακαλέωI summon, entrea

σύ

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπαράκλησις · 29× in the New Testament

2 Corinthians Acts Hebrews Romans Luke 1 Corinthians 1 Thessalonians 1 Timothy 2 Thessalonians Philemon Philippians

Across the New Testament11 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

παρακαλέωI summon, entreat, admonish, comfort×λόγοςa word, speech, divine utterance, analogy×ὑπέρ×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Contemplative Life 12c. AD 40

οἱ δὲ ἐπὶ θεραπείαν ἰόντες οὔτε ἐξ ἔθους οὔτε ἐκ παραινέσεως ἢ παρακλήσεώς τινων, ἀλλ’ ὑπ’ ἔρωτος ἁρπασθέντες οὐρανίου, καθάπερ οἱ βακχευόμενοι καὶ κορυβαντιῶντες ἐνθουσιάζουσι, μέχρις ἂν τὸ ποθούμενον ἴδωσιν.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.272c. AD 75–95

καὶ μηδὲν ὑπολαβὼν κακοῦργον δειπνήσας τρέπεται πρὸς εὐχὰς καὶ παράκλησιν τοῦ θεοῦ δέσποτα, λέγων, παντὸς αἰῶνος καὶ δημιουργὲ τῆς ὅλης οὐσίας·

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

6th c. AD 7th c. AD 5th c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD

P.Oxy. 34 2725OxyrhynchosAD 71

οθ … κειται Ἀμμωνίου τεταγμένοι εἰσὶν εἰς τὴν ϛ μετὰ πολλῆς παρακλήσεως ἵνα μοι δῶσι τὸ κερμάτιον. περὶ δὲ τῶν χορτασμάτων τῶν χοιριδίων μὴ ἀμελήσῃς ἀγοράσαι

P.Tebt. 2 392Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 134–AD 135

τὸν Κρονίωνα ἐσχηκέναι ταύτας εἰς τὸ ἴδιον τὸν δὲ Ὡρίωνα μηδὲν ἁπλῶς λαβόντα κατὰ παράκλησιν γεγράφθαι αὐτῶν. Κρονίων Κρονίωνος ὁμολογῶ παρέξεσθαι τὴν ἀδελφήν μου Εὐδαιμονίδα τὴν καὶ Πόλιτταν ἀπαρενόχλητον

P.Amh. 2 148ArsinoitesAD 487

συμπληρώσεως τοῦ χρέους. ἐὰν δὲ ἐκπροθέσμως ὑπερθῶμαι περὶ τὴν τούτων ἀπόδοσιν καὶ βουληθείης κατὰ παράκλησιν ἐμὴν ἑτέραν μοι ἐκδοῦναι πρόθεσιν

“If however we are constricted, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation if we are encouraged, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation which is operating in [the] endurance of the same sufferings that also we ourselves suffer,”

καὶ and G2532 ¶

8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in 2 Corinthians as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.

Tyndale gloss

and

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

—

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

89%and

and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

αὐτός

ἐνἐπίπρός

σύ

χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,

ἐγώ

πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god

εἰμίI am, exist

αὐτόςὁArticle theἐγώ

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe

καίand8978×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςὁArticle theπρός

οὐNeg

εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a

ὁράωI see, look upon, ex

ὁArticle theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei

ἐν

ὁArticle theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

“If however we are constricted, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation if we are encouraged, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation which is operating in [the] endurance of the same sufferings that also we ourselves suffer,”

σωτηρίας salvation G4991 ¶

46× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 2 Corinthians than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Salvation refers to rescue or safety, either physically or morally. In the New Testament, it often refers to spiritual salvation through Jesus Christ, as seen in Luke 19:9 and Acts 4:12.

Amplified meaning

rescue, spiritual deliverance

Tyndale gloss

salvation

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σωτηρία (sōtēria) is a feminine noun meaning deliverance, preservation, or salvation, derived from σωτήρ (sōtēr). It encompasses both physical safety and spiritual salvation, particularly in a Messianic context, as seen in various New Testament references such as Luke 1:69 and Acts 4:12. The term is used to describe salvation as a present reality for believers and as a future hope.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σωτηρία, -ας, ἡ

(< σωτήρ),

[in LXX for יֶשַׁע, יְשׁוּעָה, תְּשׁוּעָה, פְּלֵיטָה, etc. ;]

deliverance, preservation, salvation, safety (Lat. salus): Ac 7:25 27:34, He 11:7; ἐξ ἐχθρῶν, Lk 1:71. In NT esp. of Messianic and spiritual salvation (v.s. σώζω): Lk 19:9, Jo 4:22, Ac 4:12 13:47, Ro 11:11, II Th 2:13, II Ti 3:15, He 2:3 6:9,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σωτηρία, -as, ἡ, (σωτήρ), deliverance, preservation, safety, salvation: deliverance from the molestation of enemies, Acts vii. 25; with ἐξ ἐχθρῶν added, Lk. i. 71; preservation (of physical life), safety, Acts xxvii. 34; Heb. xi 7. in an ethical sense, that which conduces to the soul’s safety or salvation: σωτηρία τινὶ ἐγένετο, Lk. xix. 9; ἡγεῖσθαί τι σωτηρίαν, 2 Pet. iii.15; in the technical biblical sense, the Messianic salvation (see σώζω, b.), a: uniy.: Jn. iv. 22; Actsiv. 12; xiii.47; Ro. xi. 11; 2Th. ii. 13; 2 Tim. iii.15; Heb. ii.3; vi. 9; Jude3; opp. to ἀπώλεια, Phil. i. 28; αἰώνιος σωτηρία, Heb. v. 9 (for πῃ orniy, Is. xlv.17); [add, Mk. xvi. WH in the (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion’]; ὁ λόγος τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης, instruction concerning that salvation which John tie Baptist foretold [ef. W. 237 (223) ], Acts xiii. 26; τὸ evayyeλιον τῆς σωτηρίας ὑμῶν, Eph. i. 13; ὁδὸς σωτηρίας…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

σωτηρία is common in the papyri in the general sense of “‘ bodily health,” ‘‘ well-being,” ‘‘safety,’’ as in BGU II. 423% (ii/a.D.) (= Selections, p. 91) γράψον μοι ἐπιστόλιον πρῶτον μὲν περὶ τῆς σωτηρίας σου, δεύτερον περὶ τῆς τῶν ἀδελφῶν μου, 20. 63218 (ii/A.D.) ο[ὐ]χ ὀκνῶ σοι γράψαι περὶ τῆ[9] σωτηρίας μου καὶ τῶν ἐμῶν, 7. 380" (iii/A.D.) (= Selections, p. 104) ἐξέτασε (2. ἐξήτασα) περὶ τῆς σωτηplas σου καὶ τῆς πεί --ααι)δίων σου, “1 asked about your health and the health of your children,’ P Oxy VI. 939°° (iv/A.D.) (= Selections, p. 129) νὴ yap τὴν σὴν σωτηρίαν (cf. 1 Cor 1531), κύριέ pov, ἧς μάλιστά μοι μέλει, εἰ μὴ ἐπινόσως ἐσχήκει τὸ σωμάτιον τότε 6 υἱὸς ᾿Αθανάσιος, αὐτὸν ἂν ἀπέστειλα πρός σε, ‘for by your own safety, my lord, which chiefly concerns unless my son Athanasius had then been ina sickly state of body, I would have sent him to you,’’ P Oxy I. 1385 (a contract—a.D.…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σωτηρία (sōtēria) — salvation.

σωτηρ-ία,

Ionic dialect -ιη, ἡ, deliverance, preservation, σωτηρίην ὑποθησόμενον ὑμῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀπεργάζεσθαι, πορίζειν, ἐκπορίζεσθαι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐνεύχομαί σοι τὴν Ἀπολλωνίου σ. [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; ὀμνύω σωι (or σοι) τὴν σαυτοῦ σ. [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; ὑπὲρ σωτηρίας.. Αὐτοκράτορος, = Latin pro salute Imperatoris, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

2. a way or means of safety (= μηχανὴ σωτηρίας [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἔχεις τιν᾽.. σ.; [Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. safe return, ἡ ἐς τὴν πατρίδα σ. [Refs]; ἡ οἴκαδε σ. [Refs 4th c.BC+]; νόστιμος σ. [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

σωτηρία

soteria

feminine of a derivative of 4990 as (properly, abstract) noun; rescue

or safety (physically or morally):--deliver, health, salvation, save,

saving.

see GREEK for 4990

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σωτηρία, ας, ἡ

n.f.

deliverance, salvation

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σωτηρία sōtēria 46x

a saving, preservation, Acts 27:34; Heb. 11:7; deliverance, Lk. 1:69, 71; Acts 7:25; salvation, spiritual and eternal, Lk. 1:77; 19:9; Acts 4:12; Rev. 7:10; a being placed in a condition of salvation by an embracing of the Gospel, Rom. 10:1, 10; 2 Tim. 3:15; means or opportunity of salvation, Acts 13:26; Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

σωτηρία σωτηρία, ἡ, a saving, deliverance, preservation, safety, Lat. salus, Hdt., attic; ς. τινὶ διδόναι, φέρειν Eur.; σωτηρίαν ἔχειν Soph., etc.

a way or means of safety, Aesch., Eur., etc.

a safe return, ἡ ἐς τὴν πατρίδα ς. Thuc.; ἡ οἴκαδε σωτηρία Dem.; also, νόστιμος ς. Aesch.

of things, a keeping safe, preservation, τινός of anything, Hdt., Aesch., etc.

security, guarantee for safety, ς. ἔστω τινός guarantee for the safe keeping of a thing, ap. Dem.; σωτηρίαι τῆς πολιτείας ways of preserving it, Arist.

security, safety, Thuc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

—

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

sal-va'-shun:

I. IN THE OLD TESTAMENT

1. General

2. Individualism

3. Faith

4. Moral Law

5. Sacrifices

6. Ritual Law

II. INTERMEDIATE LITERATURE

1. General

2. The Law

III. THE TEACHING OF CHRIST

1. The Baptist

2. Kingdom of God

3. Present and Future

4. Individualism

5. Moral Progress

6. Forgiveness

7. Person of Christ

8. Notes

IV. PAUL

1. General

2. Moral Progress

3. The Spirit

4. Mystical Union

5. Forgiveness

6. Atonement

7. Summary

8. Notes

V. THE REST OF THE NEW TESTAMENT: SUMMARY

1. John

2. Hebrews

3. Peter

4. Summary

LITERATURE

In English Versions of the Bible the words "salvation" "save," are not technical theological terms, but denote simply "deliverance," in almost any sense the latter word can have. In systematic theology, however, "salvation" denotes the whole process by which man is delivered from all that would prevent his attaining to the highest good that God has prepared for him. Or, by a transferred sense…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Salvation

This word is used of the deliverance of the Israelites from the Egyptians (Ex. 14:13), and of deliverance generally from evil or danger. In the New Testament it is specially used with reference to the great deliverance from the guilt and the pollution of sin wrought out by Jesus Christ, “the great salvation” (Heb. 2:3). (See REDEMPTION; REGENERATION.)

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

Means, strictly, deliverance; and so it is used of temporal deliverance, victory, in Ge 14:13 1Sa 14:45. But as the spiritual deliverance from sin and death, through the Redeemer, Mt 1:21, is a far greater salvation, so this word has come to be used mostly only in this moral and spiritual sense; and implies not only this deliverance, but also the consequences of it, namely, eternal life and happiness in the kingdom of out Lord, 2Co 7:10 Eph 1:13. It is most justly described as a "great salvation," Heb 2:3.

Nave's Topical Bible

→ ILLUSTRATED BY

A horn Ps 18:2; Lu 1:69

A tower 2Sa 22:51

A helmet Isa 59:17; Eph 6:17

A shield 2Sa 22:36

A lamp Isa 62:1

A cup Ps 116:13

Clothing 2Ch 6:41; Ps 132:16; 149:4; Isa 61:10

Wells Isa 12:3

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

92%salvation

salvation92% · 47×salvation?4% · 2×other renderings4% · 2×

51 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

object33%adverbial33%subject22%predicate11%second object2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 46 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

εἰς

σύεἰμίI am, existαὐτός

ὁArticle the

ὅτιthat, since, becοὐδείςno one, none, noλόγοςa word, speech,

ἡμέραa day

ἐννῦνnow, already, at

αἰώνιοςeternal, unending

ὁArticle the

κέραςa horn

ἐγείρωI wake, arouse,

σωτηρίαsalvation46×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

οἶκοςa house, househoλαόςa people, the crἔθνοςa race, people,

διά

ὁArticle theπίστιςfaith, belief, t

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theοὗτος

ἐκ

ἐχθρόςhated, hostile, ὁArticle the

αὐτός

ὁArticle theδιά

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσωτηρία · 46× in the New Testament

Hebrews Acts Romans 1 Peter 2 Corinthians Luke Philippians Revelation 1 Thessalonians 2 Timothy 2 Peter 2 Thessalonians

Across the New Testament16 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

οἶκοςa house, household×πίστιςfaith, belief, trust×αἰώνιοςeternal, unending×οὐδείςno one, none, nothing×πιστεύωI believe, have faith in×ὑπέρ×ἀρχήruler, beginning×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

יְשׁוּעָהsalvation33%H3444 · 20 verses H3467 [יָשַׁע] Hiph. deliver; Niph. intrans. and pas15%H3467 · 9 verses

Counted over the 60 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 88c. AD 40

οἱ δ’ αὖ κυβερνῆται πρὸς τὸ τῆς νεὼς ἔσχατον χωρίον πρύμναν παρελθόντες πάντων ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν εἰσιν ἄριστοι τῶν ἐμπλεόντων, ἅτε τῆς νεὼς καὶ τῶν ἐν αὐτῇ τὴν σωτηρίαν ἐν χερσὶ ταῖς αὑτῶν ἔχοντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.76c. AD 75–95

καὶ οἱ μὲν οὕτως ἀφανίζονται πάντες, Νῶχος δὲ σώζεται μόνος ὑποθεμένου μηχανὴν αὐτῷ καὶ πόρον πρὸς σωτηρίαν τοῦ θεοῦ τοιαύτην·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.10c. AD 100

ἀκριβεύεσθαι οὖν ὀφείλομεν, ἀδελφοί, περὶ τῆς σωτηρίας ἡμῶν, ἵνα μὴ ὁ πονηρὸς παρείσδυσιν πλάνης ποιήσας ἐν ἡμῖν ἐκσφενδονήσῃ ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ τῆς ζωῆς ἡμῶν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 7th c. AD 4th c. AD

P.Worp 50Umm BaladAD 76–AD 125

Σωκράτης Ἱερωνύμῳ τῶι ἀδελφῶι χαίρειν. μὰ τὴν σὴν σωτηρίαν καὶ τὸν κύριον Ἄμμωνα … μὴ τὰ ἐν τῇ λατομίᾳ … οὐδὲ τῶι Ἀραβάρχηι

P.Mil.Vogl. 1 24Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 117

σεμνὸν κύριον καὶ ἀδελφόν. γράφεις μοι λέγων· ἐὰν δυνηθῇς ἀνάπλευσον· νὴ τὴν σήν μοι σωτηρίαν καὶ τὴν τοῦ τεκνίου μου καὶ ὀρθοποδίαν, ἧς πέπεισμαί σε κήδεσθαι οὐκ ἔλασσόν μου,

P.Stras. 7 605Ptolemais Euergetis (Arsinoites)AD 117–AD 138

γενήματα καὶ γένη καὶ κτ … … … τας οὔσας ἐν χρήσει παρὰ τῇ σωτηρίᾳ … … … τα ὑπʼ ἐμοῦ καταλειφθησόμενα … … … τατον βίον διη

“If however we are constricted, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation if we are encouraged, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation which is operating in [the] endurance of the same sufferings that also we ourselves suffer,”

εἴτε if G1535 ¶

65× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 2 Corinthians than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This word means 'whether' or 'if', used in conditions and questions, like in Matthew 11:14 and Romans 8:25. It helps us understand choices and possibilities in the Bible.

Tyndale gloss

whether

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word εἴτε (i.e., *eite*) means 'whether' or 'either...or...' and is often used to present alternatives. It is derived from two roots and appears in various contexts, including indirect questions. In the New Testament, it is found 65 times, notably in Romans and Corinthians, indicating its role in expressing choices or conditions.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἴτε, v.s. εἰ.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἴτε (eite) — whether.

εἴτε,

Doric dialect αἴτε, generally doubled, εἴτε..εἴτε.., Latin sive..sive.., either..or.., whether..or.., so that two cases are put as equally possible or equivalent; thrice repeated, [Refs 5th c.BC+] is sometimes omitted in Poets, ξεῖνος, αἴτ᾽ ὦν ἀστός [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and even in Prose, πόλις, εἴτε ἰδιῶται [Refs 5th c.BC+] Latin utrum..an.., variant in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; sometimes ἤ (ἠὲ καί.. variant in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἴτε.. εἴτε.., with subjunctive (compare εἰ), variant in [Refs 4th c.BC+]

II. in indirect questions, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἴτε

eite

from 1487 and 5037; if too:--if, or, whether.

see GREEK for 1487

see GREEK for 5037

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἴτε

Cj.

and if, whether

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

εἴτε eite 65x

whether, Rom. 12:6, 7, 8; 1 Cor. 3:22; 2 Cor. 1:6; 1 Thess. 5:10

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἴτε εἰ, τε generally doubled, εἴτε . . , εἴτε Lat. sive . . , sive, either . . , or . . , whether . . , or . . the first εἴτε is sometimes omitted in Poets:—the first εἴτε is sometimes replaced by εἰ, as εἰ . . , εἴτε . . , Hdt., Trag.

also used, like εἰ, in indirect questions, Od., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

—

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

51%or

or51% · 33×whether32% · 21×if15% · 10×other renderings2% · 1×

65 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject31%adverbial15%object6%predicate3%verb3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 65 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ζωήlife

εἴτεand if, whetherδιά

θεόςGod, a god

λέγωI say, speakἐξίστημιI astonish, am a

δοῦλος (II)

εἴτεand if, whether

ἐγώ

οὖνtherefore, thenσῶμαbody, flesh

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

παράὁArticle the

εἴτεif65×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

διδάσκωI teachπαρακαλέωI summon, entreaἐπί

διά

ζωήlifeθάνατοςdeathλόγοςa word, speech,

ἐν

σῶμαbody, fleshοὐρανόςthe sky, the hea

οὖνtherefore, then

ἐσθίωI eatἐγώ

δοῦλος (II)

εἴτεand if, whether

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἴτε · 65× in the New Testament

1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Colossians Philippians Romans 1 Peter 1 Thessalonians 2 Thessalonians Ephesians

Across the New Testament9 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

εἴτεand if, whether×διά×σῶμαbody, flesh×ζωήlife×θάνατοςdeath×δοῦλος (II)×ἈπολλῶςApollos×ΚηφᾶςCephas×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus Ignatius of Antioch Polycarp The Shepherd of Hermas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 140c. AD 40

ὥσπερ γὰρ τὸ ἀκμάζον αἰεὶ τοῦ παρηβηκότος βέλτιόν ἐστιν, εἴτε ζῷον εἴτε φυτὸν εἴτε καρπὸς εἴτ’ ἄλλο τι τῶν ἐν τῇ φύσει τυγχάνοι, οὕτως ἔοικεν ὁ μὲν πρῶτος διαπλασθεὶς ἄνθρωπος ἀκμὴ τοῦ ἡμετέρου παντὸς ὑπάρξαι γένους, οἱ δ’ ἔπειτα μηκέθ’ ὁμοίως…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.47c. AD 75–95

εἴτε γὰρ δευτέραν δέησιν ἐξεδέχετο, ταύτην γεγονέναι καὶ μετὰ πλείονος σπουδῆς·

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 9.1.10c. AD 140

διὰ τοῦτο προσετάγη ὑμῖν ἐφ̓ ἑαυτοῖς μένειν, εἴτε ἀνὴρ εἴτε γυνή: δύναται γὰρ ἐν τοῖς τοιούτοις μετάνοια εἶναι.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

6th c. AD 4th c. AD 5th c. AD 7th c. AD 3rd c. BC

P.Stras. 6 504Kerkesucha bzw. Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 106

Ἀμμωνίου πέπρακα ὡς πρόκειται Στοτοῆτις Στοτοήτιος ἠγόρακα καθὼς πρόκειται Ἀ … ι γρα Κερκεσούχων ειτε … … … ερ

APF 6 (1920), p. 85Ptolemais Euergetis (Arsinoites)AD 120–AD 121

πράγματος ὑπερτεθέντος εἰς τὴν μείζονα ἐξουσίαν συνέβη, καθὼς ἅπαντες προφέρονται, καὶ αὐτὸ τὸ παιδίον, εἴτε ἦν τῆς Ἀπίας τῆς καὶ Ἡρακλείας εἴτε ἀλλότριον, τελευτῆσαι, τὰ νῦν εἰς διάλυσιν ἀγείοχαν

P.Bodl. 1 31Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 169–AD 176

εἰπεῖν π … ε … … τοῦ ἐπιστρατήγου … ε … ο … … εἴτε δικαστοῦ. εὐδοκῶ πᾶσι τοῖς ὑπὸ σοῦ ἐπιτελεσθησομένοις. Τὸ χειρόγραφον τοῦτο κύριον ἔστω πανταχῇ ὡς

“If however we are constricted, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation if we are encouraged, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation which is operating in [the] endurance of the same sufferings that also we ourselves suffer,”

παρακαλούμεθα, we are encouraged, G3870 ¶

109× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 2 Corinthians than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

To plead with or comfort someone, as Jesus did with his disciples in Matthew 26:53 when he told them to have faith. This word can also mean to invoke or call on someone for help or guidance.

Amplified meaning

exhorted, strengthened

Tyndale gloss

to plead/comfort

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

παρακαλέω is built from the prefix παρά (near) and the root καλέω (to call). It covers a range of meanings including to summon, beseech, exhort, and comfort. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts such as Acts 28:20 and Matthew 26:53. Notably, it can also imply invoking the gods or comforting others.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

παρα-καλέω, -ῶ,

[in LXX chiefly for נחם ni., pi.;]

to call to one, call for, summon: Ac 28:20 (R, mg.; R, txt., entreat); hence (of the gods: Dem., Xen., al.), to invoke, call on, beseech, entreat: τ. πατέρα μου, Mt 26:53; τ. κύριον, II Co 12:8; in late writers (Polyb., Diod., al.; rarely in LXX; in π., v. Deiss., LAE, 17614), also of men: absol., Phm 9; c. acc., Mt 8:5, Mk 1:40, Ac 16:9, al.; c. inf., Mk 5:17, Lk 8:41, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

παρα-καλέω, -@; impf. 3 pers. sing. παρεκάλει, 1 and 3 pers. plur. παρεκάλουν ; 1 aor. παρεκάλεσα ; Pass., pres. παρακαλοῦμαι; pf. παρακέκλημαι; 1 aor. παρεκλήθην ; 1 fut. παρακληθήσομαι; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; i as in Grk. writ. to call to one’s side, call for, summon: twa, w. an inf. indicating the purpose, Acts xxviii. 20 [al. (less naturally) refer this to II. 2, making the ace. the subj. of the inf. ]. II. to address, speak to, (call to, call on), which may be done in the way of exhortation, entreaty, comfort, instruction, ete. ; hence result a variety of senses, on which see Knapp, Scripta varii arg. ed. 2 Ρ. 117 sqq.; ef. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 82 sq. ie asin Grk. auth., to admonish, exhort: absol., Lk. iii. 18; [Acts xx. 1 (RGom.)]; Ro. xii. 8; 2 Tim. iv. 2; Heb. x. 25; 1 Pet. v. 12; foll. by direct dise. 2 Co. v. 20; foll. by λέγων w. direct disc. Acts ii. 40; foll.…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

παρακαλέω, “ask,” ‘‘beseech,”’ as frequently in the NT, is a common formula in papyrus private letters, e.g. P Par 42° (B.c. 156) (= UPZ i, p. 318) παρεκάλεσα αὐτὸν ἔρχεσθαι, περὶ dv ἂν βούληται, BGU IV. 1141!° (B.c. 14) ἐρωτῶ σε οὖν Kal παρακαλῶι Kal τὴν Καίσαρος τύ[χη]ν oe ἐξορκιζῶι, and

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

παρακαλέω (parakaleō) — to plead/comfort.

παρακᾰλέω,

Attic dialect future -καλῶ, later -καλέσω[LXX]:—call to one, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. call in, send for, summon, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; invoke the gods, τοὺς θεούς [Refs 4th c.BC+]; περὶ τούτου τὸν θεόν (as medical adviser) [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; τὸν Ἐνυάλιον [Refs 5th c.BC+] —passive, παρακαλούμενος καὶ ἄκλητος, 'vocatus atque non vocatus', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; παρακαλουμένη ἀμύνειν being called upon to ward off, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. summon one's friends to attend one in a trial, π. τοὺς φίλους [Refs 4th c.BC+]; π. τινάς call them as witnesses, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—middle, uncertain in [Refs 4th c.BC+] —passive, παρακεκλημένοι summoned to attend at a trial, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

παρακαλέω

parakaleo

from 3844 and 2564; to call near, i.e. invite, invoke (by imploration,

hortation or consolation):--beseech, call for, (be of good) comfort,

desire, (give) exhort(-ation), intreat, pray.

see GREEK for 3844

see GREEK for 2564

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

παρακαλέω

v.

I summon, entreat, admonish, comfort

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

παρακαλέω parakaleō 109x

to call for, invite to come, send for, Acts 28:20; to call upon, exhort, admonish, persuade, Lk. 3:18; Acts 2:40; 11:23; to beg, beseech, entreat, implore, Mt. 8:5, 31; 18:29; Mk. 1:40; to animate, encourage, comfort, console, Mt. 2:18; 5:4; 2 Cor. 1:4, 6; pass. to be cheered, comforted, Lk. 16:25; Acts 20:12; 2 Cor. 7:13

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

παρακαλέω attic fut. -καλῶ later -καλέσω to call to one, Xen.

to call to aid, call in, send for Lat. arcessere, Hdt., Ar., etc.; π. τινα σύμβουλον Xen.:— to call on, invoke the Gods, id. Xen., etc.:—Pass., παρακαλούμενος καὶ ἄκλητος, "vocatus atque non vocatus, " Thuc.

to summon one's friends to attend one in a trial (cf. παράκλησις 1. 1):—Pass., παρακεκλημένοι summoned to attend at a trial, Aeschin.

to invite, ἐπὶ δαῖτα Eur.; ἐπὶ θήραν Xen.; π. τινὰ ἐπὶ τὸ βῆμα to invite him to mount the tribune, Aeschin.

to call to, exhort, cheer, encourage, τινά Aesch., Xen.

to comfort, console: in Pass., NTest.

to excite, τινὰ ἐς φόβον, ἐς δάκρυα Eur.: —of things, to foment, φλόγα Xen.

π. τινά, c. inf., to exhort one to do, Eur., Xen.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

—

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

16%i exhort

i exhort16% · 17×exhorting6% · 7×begging6% · 6×we exhort5% · 5×do exhort5% · 5×they were begging4% · 4×imploring3% · 3×exhort3% · 3×other renderings54% · 58×

108 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 52 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

verb99%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 109 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

ἐγώσύἀσθενέωI am weak, sick

αὐτός

πρόςὅτιthat, since, becὁράωI see, look upon

ὁArticle the

εἴτεand if, whetherἀλλάbut, exceptεἰς

οὗτος

διάἀκούωI hear, listen

διόwherefore

παρακαλέωwe are encouraged,109×

what comes after →

αὐτός

ἵναin order that, sλέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,

ὁArticle the

ἀδελφόςa brotherκαρδίαthe heart, innerαὐτός

σύ

δέbut, on the otheμεταλαμβάνωI share in, partὁράωI see, look upon

δέbut, on the other ha

σύ

ἐγώ

τέDisjἐπίὁArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπαρακαλέω · 109× in the New Testament

Acts 2 Corinthians Matthew Mark 1 Thessalonians Luke 1 Corinthians 1 Timothy Hebrews Romans 1 Peter Titus

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament19 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἀδελφόςa brother×ἵναin order that, so that×παρακαλέωI summon, entreat, admonish, comfort×καρδίαthe heart, inner life, intention×ΠαῦλοςPaul×διόwherefore×παράκλησιςexhortation, entreaty, encouragement, comfor×πέμπωI send×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

נחםNiph. be sorry, console oneself, etc. .comfort, cons55%H5162 · 33 verses

Counted over the 60 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch The Epistle of Barnabas The Shepherd of Hermas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Posterity of Cain 138c. AD 40

ἡ δὲ τὸ πρεσβύτατον τῶν παιδευμάτων διδαχθεῖσα, τὸ ἀβάσκανον καὶ φιλόδωρον, εὐθὺς ὀρέγει τὸ σοφίας νᾶμα καὶ ἐμπιεῖν ἀθρόου παρακαλεῖ μετὰ τοῦ καὶ κύριον ὀνομάζειν τὸν οἰκέτην.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.15c. AD 75–95

ἤδη τοίνυν τοὺς ἐντευξομένους τοῖς βιβλίοις παρακαλῶ τὴν γνώμην θεῷ προσανέχειν καὶ δοκιμάζειν τὸν ἡμέτερον νομοθέτην, εἰ τήν τε φύσιν ἀξίως αὐτοῦ κατενόησε καὶ τῇ δυνάμει πρεπούσας ἀεὶ τὰς πράξεις ἀνατέθεικε πάσης καθαρὸν τὸν περὶ αὐτοῦ φυλάξας…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 14.9c. AD 100

καὶ πάλιν ὁ προφήτης λέγει: Πνεῦμα κυρίου ἐπ’ ἐμέ, οὖ εἵνεκεν ἔχρισέν με εὐαγγελίσασθαι ταπεινοῖς χάριν, ἀπέσταλκέν με ἰάσασθαι τοὺς συντετριμμένους τὴν καρδίαν, κηρῦξαι αἰχμαλώτοις ἄφεσιν καὶ τυφλοῖς ἀνάβλεψιν, καλέσαι ἐνιαυτὸν κυρίου δεκτὸν καὶ…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 7th c. AD 4th c. AD 5th c. AD

Archiv für Papyrusforschung (AfP) 2 (1903), p. 517-518Pathyris131 BC

διανδραγαθήσαντα σαυτοῦ ἐπιμέλεσθαι μέχρι τοῦ τὰ πράγματα ἀποκαταστῆναι , ἔτι καὶ νῦν καλῶς ποιήσεις παρακαλῶν σαυτὸν καὶ τοὺς παρʼ ἡμῶν· προσπέπτωκεν γὰρ Παῶν ἀναπλεῖν ἐν τῶι Τῦβι μηνὶ μετὰ

ÉdP 5 (1939), p. 94Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 298

δὲ οὐδεμίαν ἡμῶν φροντίδα ποιεῖται, καὶ διʼ αὐτὸ τοῦτο ἐντάξασαι τὰ καταλειφθέντα δεόμεθα καὶ παρακαλοῦμεν τὴν σὴν φιλανθρωπίαν ὅπως κελεύσῃς αὐτῷ τῷ Χαιρήμονι ταῦτα ἡμῖν παρασχεῖν ἵνα δυνηθῶμεν ὄνησιν

P.Cair. Isid. 73Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 314

τοῦτο μὴ φέροντες τὰ ἔνγραφα ἐπιδίδομεν τῇ σῇ ἀρετῇ αὐτὰ ταῦτα μεμνημένοι, δεόμενοι καὶ παρακαλοῦντες ὅπως κελεύσῃς διὰ ἱερᾶς σου ὑπογραφῆς ἐπεξελθεῖν, τὸ σὸν μεγαλεῖον, κατά τε τοῦ πραιποσίτου

“If however we are constricted, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation if we are encouraged, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation which is operating in [the] endurance of the same sufferings that also we ourselves suffer,”

ὑπὲρhuper [it is] for G5228 Preposition ¶

154× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 2 Corinthians than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Above or for something, often used to describe doing something for someone's benefit. In Matthew 5:44 and Romans 10:1, it means praying for or on behalf of others.

Tyndale gloss

above/for

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὑπέρ (transliterated as *huper*) is a preposition meaning 'over' or 'above' when used with the genitive case, and it can imply 'for' or 'on behalf of' in various contexts. It appears frequently in the New Testament, particularly in discussions of Christ's sacrificial death, such as in Matthew 5:44 and Romans 5:6-8. The word can also express excess or superiority when used with the accusative case.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — ὑπέρ, ἀντι from a scan

Ir has been often claimed, and in the interests of an all-important truth, namely the vicarious character of the sacrifice of the death of Christ, that in such passages as Met. 4i;-93 Tit. i. 14: 1 Tim. 11. 6; Gal. 111: 13+ Luke REM 19, 203 1 Pet. 11. 21: 11.133 iv.1; Rom. v.38; John x. 15, in all of which Christ is said to have died ὑπὲρ πάντων, UTEP ἡμῶν, ὑπὲρ τῶν προβάτων, and the like, ὑπέρ shall be accepted as equipollent with ἀντί. And then, it is further urged that, as ἀντί is the preposition first of equivalence (Homer, Jl. ix. 116, 117) and then of exchange (1 Cor. xi. 15; Heb. xii. 2, 16; Matt. v. 38), ὑπέρ must in all those passages be regarded as having the same force. Each of these, it is evident, would thus become a dictum probans for a truth, in itself most vital, namely that Christ suffered, not merely on our behalf and for our good, but also in our stead, and bearing…

Read the full entry →

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὑπέρ (when following subst.—poët.—ὕπερ; so as adv., II Co 11:23),

prep. c. gen., acc.

C. gen., primarily of place (rest or motion), over, above, across, beyond, hence, metaph.,

for, on behalf of: of prayer, Mt 5:44, Ac 8:24, Ro 10:1, Ja 5:16, al.; of laying down life, Jo 10:11, Ro 9:3, al.; esp. of Christ giving his life for man's redemption, Mk 14:24, Jo 10:15, Ac 21:13, Ro 5:6-8, al.; opp. to κατά,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἁμαρτίαν ἐποίησεν (μὴ γνόντα is said agreeably to the judgment of ὁ ποιήσας), 2 Co. ν. 21 (τὸν οὐ γνόντα would be equiv. to ἀγνοοῦντα). in predictions, where it expresses the opinion of those who predict: ἔσῃ σιωπῶν καὶ μὴ δυνάμενος λαλῆσαι, Lk. i. 20; ἔσῃ τυφλὸς μὴ βλέπων, Acts xiii. 11. where the writer or speaker does ποῦ regard the thing itself so much as the thought of the thing, which he wishes to remove from the mind of the reader or hearer (Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 666), — to be rendered without ete. (Germ. ohne zu with inf.) [ef. B. § 148, 7 b.]: ἐξῆλθε μὴ ἐπιστάμενος, ποῦ ἔρχεται, Heb. xi. 8; add, Mt. xxii. 12; Lk. xiii. 11 [(but ef. B. § 148, 7¢.)]; Acts v. 7; xx. 22; Heb.ix.9. where the participles have a conditional, causal, or concessive force, and may be resolved into clauses introduced by if, on condition that, etc. : θερίσομεν μὴ ἐκλυόμενοι, Gal. vi. 9; μὴ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὑπέρ. From its original locative meaning ‘‘ over” (as in P Par 1145 (B.C. 117) τὰ μὲν ὑπὲρ [γῆς], ταῦθ᾽ ὑπὸ γῆς), ὑπέρ came to be applied in a variety of ways. I. c. gen. (a) = ‘‘for,” ‘‘on behalf of,” ‘‘in the place of”: P Tebt I. 6% (B.c, 140-139) ἐπιτ]ελεῖν τὰ νομιζόμενα τοῖς θεοῖς ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν Kal τῶν τ[έκ]νων, ‘to pay the customary offerings to the gods on behalf of us and our children” (Edd.), P Oxy IV. 743°° (B.c. 2) συνπροσγενέσθαι αὐτῶι ὡς ἀνθομολογη(σομένῳ᾽ ὑπέρ cov οὕτως ὡς ὑπίέρ) pov, ‘‘stand by him, as he will agree in everything for you just as for me”’ (Edd.), and BGU I. 246} (ii/iii a..) γυκτὸς Kal ἡμέρας ἐντυνχάνω TO θεῷ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν. Cf. also crane, ὑπερ with Mk 9*° the Christian P Iand I. 168 (v/vi A.D.) τὸ νόμιμον ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἐστιν, and with 1 Cor 152% A/iche/ 1001: 10 (will of Epicteta—c. B.C. 200) τοῦ kal κατασκεναξαμένου τὸ μουσεῖον ὑπὲρ τοῦ μεταλλαχότος ἁμῶν υἱοῦ…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὑπέρ (huper) — above/for.

ὑπέρ [ῠ],

Epic dialect also ὑπείρ, used by [Refs 8th c.BC+] ὁπέρ (which see): in Aeolic dialect replaced by περί (see. περί [Refs 4th c.BC+] also dative (Cf. Sanskrit upaári 'above', Gothic ufar, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] ofer 'over':—from it are formed the comparative and superlative ὑπέρτερος, -τατος, also adverb ὕπερθεν, and Nouns ὑπέρα, ὕπερος.)

__A WITH GENIT.,

__A.I of Place, over;

__A.I.1 in a state of rest, over, above, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; χιτωνίσκους ἐνεδεδύκεσαν ὑ. γονάτων not reaching to the knees, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; στῆ δ᾽ ἄρ᾽ ὑ. κεφαλῆς stood over his head as he lay asleep, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὑ. κεφαλῆς οἱ ἐγίνετο διεξελαύνοντι over head, i. e. over the gateway, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ὑ. κεφαλῆς the higher ground, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἰονίας ὑ. ἁλὸς οἰκέων on the Ionian sea…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὑπέρ

huper

a primary preposition; "over", i.e. (with the genitive case) of place,

above, beyond, across, or causal, for the sake of, instead, regarding;

with the accusative case superior to, more than:--(+ exceeding,

abundantly) above, in (on) behalf of, beyond, by, + very chiefest,

concerning, exceeding (above, -ly), for, + very highly, more (than),

of, over, on the part of, for sake of, in stead, than, to(-ward),

very. In the comparative, it retains many of the above applications.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὑπέρ

Prep.

in behalf of, above

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὑπέρ hyper 150x

(1) gen., above, over; met. in behalf of, Mt. 5:44; Mk. 9:40; Jn. 17:19; instead of beneficially, Phlm. 13; in maintenance of, Rom. 15:8; for the furtherance of, Jn. 11:4; 2 Cor. 1:6, 8; for the realization of, Phil. 2:13; equivalent to περί, about, concerning, with the further signification of interest or concern in the subject, Acts 5:41; Rom. 9:27; Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὑπέρ over, above, w. gen, over, beyond, w. acc.

Lat. super:—hence are formed comp. and Sup. ὑπέρτερος, -τατος.

WITH GENIT.,

of Place, over, above:

in a state of rest, στέρνον ὑπὲρ μαζοῖο Il.; ὑπὲρ κεφαλῆς στῆναί τινι to stand over his head, Hom.: of countries, above, further inland, οἰκέοντες ὑπὲρ Ἁλικαρνησσοῦ μεσόγαιαν Hdt.

in a state of motion, over, across, ὑπὲρ θαλάσσης καὶ χθονὸς ποτωμένοις Aesch.

over, beyond, ὑπὲρ πόντου Od.

metaph., from the notion of standing over to protect, for, for defence of, in behalf of, ἑκατόμβην ῥέξαι ὑπὲρ Δαναῶν Il.; θύειν ὑπὲρ τῆς πόλεως Xen.; ὑπὲρ τῆς πατρίδος ἀμύνειν to fight for one's country, etc.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

for (ki (conjunction), le, from 'el (preposition), and various other words. In the New Testament also the words are various, chiefly gar, kai gar, hoti (conjunctions); anti apo eis dia (accusative), epi (dative and accusative), peri (genitive), pros (genitive and accusative), huper (genitive) (prepositions)): the English Revised Version and the American Standard Revised Version give in many cases more literal or more accurate renderings than those in the King James Version.

In the New Testament the most important preps. from a doctrinal point of view are anti, "face to face," "over against," "instead," "on behalf of," peri, "around," "about," "concerning," huper, "over," "on behalf of." The first has been claimed as stating the substitutionary nature of Christ's sacrifice as contrasted with huper and peri, more frequently used of it. But, although anti in the New Testament often means…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

65%for

for65% · 102×above7% · 11×on behalf of5% · 8×concerning5% · 8×beyond3% · 5×about3% · 5×on behalf3% · 4×other renderings4% · 6×other renderings6% · 9×

158 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 17 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial87%predicate8%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 154 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

ἐγώὑστερέωI am lacking, faσῶμαbody, flesh

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theχάριςgrace, favor, ki

ἐγώ

κατάψυχήthe soul, life, θλῖψιςpersecution, aff

σύ

κατάψυχήthe soul, life, δέομαιI request, beg

ἀποθνῄσκωI am dying, am about

ἄνθρωποςa man, one of thἸησοῦςJesusτὶς

ὑπέρ[it is] for154×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ὄνομαname, character,ψυχήthe soul, life, σύ

ἐγώ

πρόςἵναin order that, sοὐNeg

σύ

καίand, even, also,καυχάομαιI boast, gloryἐν

πᾶςall, the whole, ever

ἀποθνῄσκωI am dying, am aὁArticle theσύ

ὅς

ἐγώΧριστόςanointed, the MeγράφωI write

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὑπέρ · 154× in the New Testament

2 Corinthians Romans John Ephesians Hebrews 1 Corinthians Acts Colossians Philippians Luke Matthew Galatians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament22 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἀποθνῄσκωI am dying, am about to die×ψυχήthe soul, life, self×ὄνομαname, character, reputation×ἁμαρτίαa sin×τίθημιI put, place×ἔθνοςa race, people, the Gentiles×παραδίδωμιI hand over, deliver, betray×εὐχαριστέωI thank, give thanks×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 5c. AD 40

οὐ μὴν διὰ τοῦθ’ ἡσυχαστέον, ἀλλ’ ἕνεκα τοῦ θεοφιλοῦς καὶ ὑπὲρ δύναμιν ἐπιτολμητέον λέγειν, οἴκοθεν μὲν οὐδέν, ὀλίγα δ’ ἀντὶ πολλῶν, ἐφ’ ἃ τὴν ἀνθρωπίνην διάνοιαν φθάνειν εἰκὸς ἔρωτι καὶ πόθῳ σοφίας κατεσχημένην.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.70c. AD 75–95

ὑπὲρ δὲ τοῦ μὴ διαφυγεῖν τοὺς ἀνθρώπους τὰ ηὑρημένα μηδὲ πρὶν εἰς γνῶσιν ἐλθεῖν φθαρῆναι, προειρηκότος ἀφανισμὸν Ἀδάμου τῶν ὅλων ἔσεσθαι τὸν μὲν κατʼ ἰσχὺν πυρὸς τὸν ἕτερον δὲ κατὰ βίαν καὶ πλῆθος ὕδατος, στήλας δύο ποιησάμενοι τὴν μὲν ἐκ πλίνθου…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν Πτολεμαίδι.

P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

τριακοσίων · καὶ μὴ ἐπελεύσεσθαι μήτʼ αὐτὸν Ψενενοῦπιν ἐπὶ τὸν Ἁρσιῆσιν μήτʼ ἄλλον μηδένα ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ περὶ τοῦ διασαφουμένου μέρους γῆς τρόπῳ μηδενί. εἰ δὲ μή, ἀποτεισάτω Ἁρσιήσει ἐπίτιμον

P.Adl. 14Pathyris101 BC

μοι ἄπρατον γῆς ἀρουρῶν γ, καὶ μὴ ἐπελεύσεσθαι μήτʼ αὐτὸν Κολλούθην μήδʼ ἄλλον μηδένα ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τὸν Ὧρον μήδʼ ἐπʼ ἄλλον μηδένα τῶν παρʼ αὐτοῦ περὶ τῶν ἀρουρῶν

“If however we are constricted, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation if we are encouraged, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation which is operating in [the] endurance of the same sufferings that also we ourselves suffer,”

τῆςho <the> G3588 Article · genitive · singular · feminine ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in 2 Corinthians as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-GSF — Article · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁ<the>19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“If however we are constricted, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation if we are encouraged, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation which is operating in [the] endurance of the same sufferings that also we ourselves suffer,”

ὑμῶνsu your G4771 Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · plural ¶

2,892× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 2 Corinthians than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This Greek word means 'you' and is used to address someone directly, like in John 1:30 and Matthew 26:64. It's a way to emphasize or contrast the person being spoken to. The KJV Bible translates it as 'thou'.

Tyndale gloss

you

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σύ is the second-person singular pronoun meaning 'you' in Greek. It has various forms: genitive σοῦ, dative σοί, and accusative σέ. The word can be used for emphasis or contrast, particularly in the New Testament, as seen in verses like Matthew 26:64. It also appears in various dialects and has enclitic forms.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σύ,

pron. of 2nd pers.,

thou, you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mt 25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jo 1:30, 42 4:10 5:33, 39, 44, Ac 4:7, Eph 5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mt 26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mt 2:6, Lk 1:76, Jo 17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. (exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. [W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σύ (su) — you.

σύ [ῠ],

thou: pronoun of the second person:—Epic dialect nominative τύνη [ῡ] [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Laconian dialect τούνη [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect σύ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τύ [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τού [short syllable] [Refs 6th c.BC+] (also τούν [Refs]σύ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Gen. σοῦ, [Refs], elsewhere only Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enclitic σου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also in Lyric poetry, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (which also occurs in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and as enclitic σευ, [Refs 8th c.BC+], σεο (enclitic) [Refs] σευ (enclitic) [Refs]:—Doric dialect τεῦ, τευ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; rarely τέο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τεῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τεοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοι variant in [Refs]; enclitic τεος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; other Doric dialect forms are τίω, τίως, both [Refs 3rd c.BC+]—Dat. σοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

σύ

su

the person pronoun of the second person singular; thou:-- thou. See

also 4571, 4671, 4675; and for the plural 5209, 5210, 5213, 5216.

see GREEK for 4675

see GREEK for 4571

see GREEK for 4671

see GREEK for 5209

see GREEK for 5210

see GREEK for 5213

see GREEK for 5216

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ

Pers.pr.

you

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σύ sy 2x

you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, Mt. 1:20; 2:6

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Pron-2GP — Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · plural
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-2GP Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: second Case: Genitive Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

78%you

you78% · 2412×you yourselves7% · 221×you yourself5% · 168×your3% · 87×other renderings3% · 96×other renderings3% · 89×

3,073 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject28%object24%adverbial23%indirect object20%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,892 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

λέγωI say, speak

ἀμήνHebrδέbut, on the otheἐγώ

καίand, even, also, nam

ἐγώοὕτωthus, so, in thiμήNeg

ἐν

ὁArticle theεἰμίI am, existγίνομαιI come into bein

πρός

ἔρχομαιI come, goἐγώπέμπωI send

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakπαρακαλέωI summon, entreaθέλωI will, wish, de

σύyour2892×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

θεόςGod, a godἐνἁμαρτίαa sin

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theεἰρήνηpeace, peace of οὐNeg

ὅτιthat, since, because

ὁArticle theπᾶςall, the whole, οὐNeg

εἰμίI am, exist

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐν

ἐν

ὁArticle theποῖοςIrgΧριστόςanointed, the Me

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσύ · 2,892× in the New Testament

Matthew Luke John Acts Mark 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Romans 1 Thessalonians Revelation Hebrews Colossians

16 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἀμήνHebr×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

אַתָּ֫האָ֑תָּה pron. 2 s. m. thou H859b אתי, i.e. אתִּי, th66%H859 · 301 verses

Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.48c. AD 40

„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.101c. AD 75–95

παύσομαι δὲ τοῦ λοιποῦ μετὰ τοσαύτης ὀργῆς τὰς τιμωρίας ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀδικήμασιν εἰσπραττόμενος καὶ πολὺ μᾶλλον σοῦ παρακαλοῦντος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC

P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν

P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

η Φατρήους καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ

P.Grenf. 1 41Thebais3 BC

παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .

“If however we are constricted, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation if we are encouraged, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation which is operating in [the] endurance of the same sufferings that also we ourselves suffer,”

παρακλήσεωςparaklēsis comfort G3874 Noun · genitive · singular · feminine ¶

29× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 2 Corinthians than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Encouragement is about giving comfort or solace to someone, like in 2 Corinthians 8:4. It's also about exhorting or urging someone to do something, as seen in Acts and other biblical passages.

Amplified meaning

solace, reassurance

Tyndale gloss

encouragement

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word παράκλησις (paraklesis) is derived from παρακαλέω and encompasses meanings such as a calling for aid, exhortation, encouragement, and comfort. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, notably in passages like 2 Corinthians 1:4-7 and Romans 15:5. Some lexicons emphasize its use in both consolation and exhortation, reflecting its broad application in both personal and communal settings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

παρά-κλησις, -εως, ἡ

(< παρακαλέω),

[in LXX: Jb 21:2, Ps 93 (94):19, Ho 13:14, Na 3:7, Is 57:18 66:11, Je 16:7 (נחם, its parts and derivatives), Je 38 (31):9 (תַּחֲנוּן), Is 28:29 30:7, I Mac 10:24 12:9, II Mac 7:24 15:11*;]

a calling to one's aid, summons (Thus.), hence, appeal, entreaty (Strab., Plut., al., I Mac 10:24; cf. Lft., Notes, 20): II Co 8:4.

exhortation, encouragement: Ac 15:31, Ro 12:8, I Co 14:3, II Co 8:17, Phl 2:1, I Th 2:3,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

παρά-κλησις, -ews, 7), (παρακαλέω, α. V-) ; 1. prop. a calling near, summons, (esp. for help, Thue. 4, 61; Dem. p. 275, 20). 2. imploration, supplication, entreaty: 2 Co. viii. 4 (Strab. 13 p. 581; Joseph. antt. 3, 1,5; [e. Ap. 2, 23, 3 a. πρὸς τὸν θεὸν ἔστω] ; λόγοι παρακλήσεως, words of appeal, containing entreaties, 1 Mace. Tapakoyn x. 24). 3. exhortation, admonition, encouragement: Acts xv. 31 [al. refer this to 4]; 1 Co. xiv. 3; 2 Co. viii. 17; Phil. ii. 1; 1 Tim. iv. 13; Heb. xii. 5; λόγος τῆς παρακλήσεως, Heb. xiii. 22, (2 Mace. vii. 24; xv. 9 (11); Plat. def. 415 e.; Thue. 8, 92; Aeschin., Polyb., al.). 4. consolation, comfort, solace: 2 Co. i. 4-7; Heb. vi. 18; [add, Acts ix. 31; 2 Thess. ii. 16], (Jer. xvi. 7; Hos. xiii. 14; [Job xxi. 2; Nah. iii. 7]; Phalar. ep. 97 init.) ; τῶν γραφῶν, afforded by the contents of the Scriptures, Ro. xv. 4 [W. 189 (178)]; θεὸς τῆς παρακλ., God…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

παράκλησις. For the primary meaning “appeal,” ‘‘exhortation’’ (as in 1 Thess 28, 2 Cor δὴ) cf. P Grenf I. 321° (B.c. 102) δι[ὰ τ]ὰς ἡμῶν παρακλήσεις, with reference to the ‘appeals ” made to allow three soldiers to come to a certain spot, and P Tebt II. 3925 (A.D. 134-5) of the insertion of a name in an agreement of indemnity at the instance of others—ka[T]a παράκλησιν γέγραπται αὐτῶν. Seealso the late P Flor III. 323° (A.D. 525) δεή]σεις kal παρακλή[σ]εις προσ{ε]νήνοχά got, and from the inserr. Sy// 552 (= %695)** (after B.c. 129) κατευχὴν καὶ παράκλησιν παντὸς τοῦ πλήθους ποιεῖσθαι. On the semi-technical use οἵ παράκλησις in Lk 2535 with reference to the coming of the Messiah see Dalman Words, p- togf., and on the similar meaning ‘‘comfort’’ (not “invocation ’’ as Hort Ecclesta p. 55) in Ac 9951 see Swete Holy Spirit in the NT p. 96f. As against the derivation of BapvaBas — vids…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

παράκλησις (paraklēsis) — encouragement.

παρά-κλησις, εως, ἡ,

calling to one's aid, summons, οἱ ἐκ παρακλήσεως συγκαθήμενοι a packed party in the assembly, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

2. imploring, appealing, τινος of or on the part of one, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; deprecation, συγγνώμης δεῖ καὶ π. [Refs 1st c.BC+]

3. invocation of gods, [Refs 4th c.AD+]

4. demand, request, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; κατὰ-σιν on demand, [Refs 3rd c.AD+]

II. exhortation, address, πρὸς τὸν ὄχλον [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐ π. εὑρόντες, ἀλλὰ παραίνεσιν γράψαντες not a mere address to their feelings, but counsel to act rightly, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀξιώσεισκαὶ-κλήσεις [Refs 2nd c.BC+]

III. consolation, [LXX+NT+3rd c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

παράκλησις

paraklesis

from 3870; imploration, hortation, solace:--comfort, consolation,

exhortation, intreaty.

see GREEK for 3870

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

παράκλησις, εως, ἡ

n.f.

exhortation, entreaty, encouragement, comfort

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

παράκλησις paraklēsis 29x

a calling upon, exhortation, incitement, persuasion, Rom. 12:8; 1 Cor. 14:3; hortatory instruction, Acts 13:15; 15:31; entreaty, importunity, earnest supplication, 2 Cor. 8:4; solace, consolation, Lk. 2:25; Rom. 15:4, 5; 2 Cor. 1:3, 4, 5, 6, 7; cheering and supporting influence, Acts 9:31; joy, gladness, rejoicing, 2 Cor. 7:13; cheer, joy, enjoyment, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

παράκλησις παράκλησις, εως, παρακαλέω a calling to one's aid, summons, οἱ ἐκ παρακλήσεως συγκαθήμενοι a packed party in the jury, Dem.

a calling upon, appealing, τινος to one, Thuc.: intreaty, deprecation, Strab.

an exhortation, address, Thuc., Aeschin.: encouragement, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-GSF — Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

kum'-fert (nacham; parakaleo): The New Testament word is variously translated, as "comfort," "exhort," "beseech," the exact translation to be determined by the context. Etymologically, it is "to call alongside of," i.e. to summon for assistance. To comfort is to cheer and encourage. It has a positive force wanting in its synonym "console," as it indicates the dispelling of grief by the impartation of strength. the Revised Version (British and American) has correctly changed the translation of paramutheomai from the King James Version "comfort," to "consolation." So in the Old Testament, "Comfort ye my people" (Isa 40:1) is much stronger than "console," which affords only the power of calm endurance of affliction, while the brightest hopes of the future and the highest incentives to present activity are the gifts of the Divine grace…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ See AFFLICTION, CONSOLATION IN

→ See RIGHTEOUS, PROMISES TO

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

38%comfort

comfort38% · 11×encouragement31% · 9×exhortation21% · 6×entreaty3% · 1×appeal3% · 1×consolation3% · 1×

29 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 6 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial45%object31%subject21%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 29 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

καίand, even, also,ἐνδιά

καίand, even, also, nam

οἰκοδομήthe act of buildἔχωI have, hold, po

σύ

ὁArticle the

προσδέχομαιI expect, welcome, a

εὐλαβήςcautious, pious

υἱόςa son, descendent

μεθερμηνεύωI translate, int

παράκλησιςcomfort29×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἸσραήλPropἅγιοςset apart, holy,μεταδίδωμιI share, impart

καίand, even, also, nam

παραμυθίαencouragement, cσωτηρίαdeliverance, salγάρfor

ἐγώ

περισσῶςCompοὐNeg

ὅς

παρακαλέωI summon, entrea

σύ

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπαράκλησις · 29× in the New Testament

2 Corinthians Acts Hebrews Romans Luke 1 Corinthians 1 Thessalonians 1 Timothy 2 Thessalonians Philemon Philippians

Across the New Testament11 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

παρακαλέωI summon, entreat, admonish, comfort×λόγοςa word, speech, divine utterance, analogy×ὑπέρ×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Contemplative Life 12c. AD 40

οἱ δὲ ἐπὶ θεραπείαν ἰόντες οὔτε ἐξ ἔθους οὔτε ἐκ παραινέσεως ἢ παρακλήσεώς τινων, ἀλλ’ ὑπ’ ἔρωτος ἁρπασθέντες οὐρανίου, καθάπερ οἱ βακχευόμενοι καὶ κορυβαντιῶντες ἐνθουσιάζουσι, μέχρις ἂν τὸ ποθούμενον ἴδωσιν.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.272c. AD 75–95

καὶ μηδὲν ὑπολαβὼν κακοῦργον δειπνήσας τρέπεται πρὸς εὐχὰς καὶ παράκλησιν τοῦ θεοῦ δέσποτα, λέγων, παντὸς αἰῶνος καὶ δημιουργὲ τῆς ὅλης οὐσίας·

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

6th c. AD 7th c. AD 5th c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD

P.Oxy. 34 2725OxyrhynchosAD 71

οθ … κειται Ἀμμωνίου τεταγμένοι εἰσὶν εἰς τὴν ϛ μετὰ πολλῆς παρακλήσεως ἵνα μοι δῶσι τὸ κερμάτιον. περὶ δὲ τῶν χορτασμάτων τῶν χοιριδίων μὴ ἀμελήσῃς ἀγοράσαι

P.Tebt. 2 392Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 134–AD 135

τὸν Κρονίωνα ἐσχηκέναι ταύτας εἰς τὸ ἴδιον τὸν δὲ Ὡρίωνα μηδὲν ἁπλῶς λαβόντα κατὰ παράκλησιν γεγράφθαι αὐτῶν. Κρονίων Κρονίωνος ὁμολογῶ παρέξεσθαι τὴν ἀδελφήν μου Εὐδαιμονίδα τὴν καὶ Πόλιτταν ἀπαρενόχλητον

P.Amh. 2 148ArsinoitesAD 487

συμπληρώσεως τοῦ χρέους. ἐὰν δὲ ἐκπροθέσμως ὑπερθῶμαι περὶ τὴν τούτων ἀπόδοσιν καὶ βουληθείης κατὰ παράκλησιν ἐμὴν ἑτέραν μοι ἐκδοῦναι πρόθεσιν

“If however we are constricted, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation if we are encouraged, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation which is operating in [the] endurance of the same sufferings that also we ourselves suffer,”

καιkai and G2532 Conjunction ¶

8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in 2 Corinthians as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.

Tyndale gloss

and

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

89%and

and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

αὐτός

ἐνἐπίπρός

σύ

χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,

ἐγώ

πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god

εἰμίI am, exist

αὐτόςὁArticle theἐγώ

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe

καίand8978×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςὁArticle theπρός

οὐNeg

εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a

ὁράωI see, look upon, ex

ὁArticle theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei

ἐν

ὁArticle theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

“If however we are constricted, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation if we are encouraged, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation which is operating in [the] endurance of the same sufferings that also we ourselves suffer,”

σωτηριαςsōtēria salvation G4991 Noun · genitive · singular · feminine ¶

46× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 2 Corinthians than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Salvation refers to rescue or safety, either physically or morally. In the New Testament, it often refers to spiritual salvation through Jesus Christ, as seen in Luke 19:9 and Acts 4:12.

Tyndale gloss

salvation

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σωτηρία (sōtēria) is a feminine noun meaning deliverance, preservation, or salvation, derived from σωτήρ (sōtēr). It encompasses both physical safety and spiritual salvation, particularly in a Messianic context, as seen in various New Testament references such as Luke 1:69 and Acts 4:12. The term is used to describe salvation as a present reality for believers and as a future hope.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σωτηρία, -ας, ἡ

(< σωτήρ),

[in LXX for יֶשַׁע, יְשׁוּעָה, תְּשׁוּעָה, פְּלֵיטָה, etc. ;]

deliverance, preservation, salvation, safety (Lat. salus): Ac 7:25 27:34, He 11:7; ἐξ ἐχθρῶν, Lk 1:71. In NT esp. of Messianic and spiritual salvation (v.s. σώζω): Lk 19:9, Jo 4:22, Ac 4:12 13:47, Ro 11:11, II Th 2:13, II Ti 3:15, He 2:3 6:9,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σωτηρία, -as, ἡ, (σωτήρ), deliverance, preservation, safety, salvation: deliverance from the molestation of enemies, Acts vii. 25; with ἐξ ἐχθρῶν added, Lk. i. 71; preservation (of physical life), safety, Acts xxvii. 34; Heb. xi 7. in an ethical sense, that which conduces to the soul’s safety or salvation: σωτηρία τινὶ ἐγένετο, Lk. xix. 9; ἡγεῖσθαί τι σωτηρίαν, 2 Pet. iii.15; in the technical biblical sense, the Messianic salvation (see σώζω, b.), a: uniy.: Jn. iv. 22; Actsiv. 12; xiii.47; Ro. xi. 11; 2Th. ii. 13; 2 Tim. iii.15; Heb. ii.3; vi. 9; Jude3; opp. to ἀπώλεια, Phil. i. 28; αἰώνιος σωτηρία, Heb. v. 9 (for πῃ orniy, Is. xlv.17); [add, Mk. xvi. WH in the (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion’]; ὁ λόγος τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης, instruction concerning that salvation which John tie Baptist foretold [ef. W. 237 (223) ], Acts xiii. 26; τὸ evayyeλιον τῆς σωτηρίας ὑμῶν, Eph. i. 13; ὁδὸς σωτηρίας…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

σωτηρία is common in the papyri in the general sense of “‘ bodily health,” ‘‘ well-being,” ‘‘safety,’’ as in BGU II. 423% (ii/a.D.) (= Selections, p. 91) γράψον μοι ἐπιστόλιον πρῶτον μὲν περὶ τῆς σωτηρίας σου, δεύτερον περὶ τῆς τῶν ἀδελφῶν μου, 20. 63218 (ii/A.D.) ο[ὐ]χ ὀκνῶ σοι γράψαι περὶ τῆ[9] σωτηρίας μου καὶ τῶν ἐμῶν, 7. 380" (iii/A.D.) (= Selections, p. 104) ἐξέτασε (2. ἐξήτασα) περὶ τῆς σωτηplas σου καὶ τῆς πεί --ααι)δίων σου, “1 asked about your health and the health of your children,’ P Oxy VI. 939°° (iv/A.D.) (= Selections, p. 129) νὴ yap τὴν σὴν σωτηρίαν (cf. 1 Cor 1531), κύριέ pov, ἧς μάλιστά μοι μέλει, εἰ μὴ ἐπινόσως ἐσχήκει τὸ σωμάτιον τότε 6 υἱὸς ᾿Αθανάσιος, αὐτὸν ἂν ἀπέστειλα πρός σε, ‘for by your own safety, my lord, which chiefly concerns unless my son Athanasius had then been ina sickly state of body, I would have sent him to you,’’ P Oxy I. 1385 (a contract—a.D.…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σωτηρία (sōtēria) — salvation.

σωτηρ-ία,

Ionic dialect -ιη, ἡ, deliverance, preservation, σωτηρίην ὑποθησόμενον ὑμῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀπεργάζεσθαι, πορίζειν, ἐκπορίζεσθαι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐνεύχομαί σοι τὴν Ἀπολλωνίου σ. [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; ὀμνύω σωι (or σοι) τὴν σαυτοῦ σ. [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; ὑπὲρ σωτηρίας.. Αὐτοκράτορος, = Latin pro salute Imperatoris, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

2. a way or means of safety (= μηχανὴ σωτηρίας [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἔχεις τιν᾽.. σ.; [Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. safe return, ἡ ἐς τὴν πατρίδα σ. [Refs]; ἡ οἴκαδε σ. [Refs 4th c.BC+]; νόστιμος σ. [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

σωτηρία

soteria

feminine of a derivative of 4990 as (properly, abstract) noun; rescue

or safety (physically or morally):--deliver, health, salvation, save,

saving.

see GREEK for 4990

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σωτηρία, ας, ἡ

n.f.

deliverance, salvation

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σωτηρία sōtēria 46x

a saving, preservation, Acts 27:34; Heb. 11:7; deliverance, Lk. 1:69, 71; Acts 7:25; salvation, spiritual and eternal, Lk. 1:77; 19:9; Acts 4:12; Rev. 7:10; a being placed in a condition of salvation by an embracing of the Gospel, Rom. 10:1, 10; 2 Tim. 3:15; means or opportunity of salvation, Acts 13:26; Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

σωτηρία σωτηρία, ἡ, a saving, deliverance, preservation, safety, Lat. salus, Hdt., attic; ς. τινὶ διδόναι, φέρειν Eur.; σωτηρίαν ἔχειν Soph., etc.

a way or means of safety, Aesch., Eur., etc.

a safe return, ἡ ἐς τὴν πατρίδα ς. Thuc.; ἡ οἴκαδε σωτηρία Dem.; also, νόστιμος ς. Aesch.

of things, a keeping safe, preservation, τινός of anything, Hdt., Aesch., etc.

security, guarantee for safety, ς. ἔστω τινός guarantee for the safe keeping of a thing, ap. Dem.; σωτηρίαι τῆς πολιτείας ways of preserving it, Arist.

security, safety, Thuc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-GSF — Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

sal-va'-shun:

I. IN THE OLD TESTAMENT

1. General

2. Individualism

3. Faith

4. Moral Law

5. Sacrifices

6. Ritual Law

II. INTERMEDIATE LITERATURE

1. General

2. The Law

III. THE TEACHING OF CHRIST

1. The Baptist

2. Kingdom of God

3. Present and Future

4. Individualism

5. Moral Progress

6. Forgiveness

7. Person of Christ

8. Notes

IV. PAUL

1. General

2. Moral Progress

3. The Spirit

4. Mystical Union

5. Forgiveness

6. Atonement

7. Summary

8. Notes

V. THE REST OF THE NEW TESTAMENT: SUMMARY

1. John

2. Hebrews

3. Peter

4. Summary

LITERATURE

In English Versions of the Bible the words "salvation" "save," are not technical theological terms, but denote simply "deliverance," in almost any sense the latter word can have. In systematic theology, however, "salvation" denotes the whole process by which man is delivered from all that would prevent his attaining to the highest good that God has prepared for him. Or, by a transferred sense…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Salvation

This word is used of the deliverance of the Israelites from the Egyptians (Ex. 14:13), and of deliverance generally from evil or danger. In the New Testament it is specially used with reference to the great deliverance from the guilt and the pollution of sin wrought out by Jesus Christ, “the great salvation” (Heb. 2:3). (See REDEMPTION; REGENERATION.)

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

Means, strictly, deliverance; and so it is used of temporal deliverance, victory, in Ge 14:13 1Sa 14:45. But as the spiritual deliverance from sin and death, through the Redeemer, Mt 1:21, is a far greater salvation, so this word has come to be used mostly only in this moral and spiritual sense; and implies not only this deliverance, but also the consequences of it, namely, eternal life and happiness in the kingdom of out Lord, 2Co 7:10 Eph 1:13. It is most justly described as a "great salvation," Heb 2:3.

Nave's Topical Bible

→ ILLUSTRATED BY

A horn Ps 18:2; Lu 1:69

A tower 2Sa 22:51

A helmet Isa 59:17; Eph 6:17

A shield 2Sa 22:36

A lamp Isa 62:1

A cup Ps 116:13

Clothing 2Ch 6:41; Ps 132:16; 149:4; Isa 61:10

Wells Isa 12:3

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

92%salvation

salvation92% · 47×salvation?4% · 2×other renderings4% · 2×

51 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

object33%adverbial33%subject22%predicate11%second object2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 46 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

εἰς

σύεἰμίI am, existαὐτός

ὁArticle the

ὅτιthat, since, becοὐδείςno one, none, noλόγοςa word, speech,

ἡμέραa day

ἐννῦνnow, already, at

αἰώνιοςeternal, unending

ὁArticle the

κέραςa horn

ἐγείρωI wake, arouse,

σωτηρίαsalvation46×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

οἶκοςa house, househoλαόςa people, the crἔθνοςa race, people,

διά

ὁArticle theπίστιςfaith, belief, t

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theοὗτος

ἐκ

ἐχθρόςhated, hostile, ὁArticle the

αὐτός

ὁArticle theδιά

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσωτηρία · 46× in the New Testament

Hebrews Acts Romans 1 Peter 2 Corinthians Luke Philippians Revelation 1 Thessalonians 2 Timothy 2 Peter 2 Thessalonians

Across the New Testament16 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

οἶκοςa house, household×πίστιςfaith, belief, trust×αἰώνιοςeternal, unending×οὐδείςno one, none, nothing×πιστεύωI believe, have faith in×ὑπέρ×ἀρχήruler, beginning×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

יְשׁוּעָהsalvation33%H3444 · 20 verses H3467 [יָשַׁע] Hiph. deliver; Niph. intrans. and pas15%H3467 · 9 verses

Counted over the 60 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 88c. AD 40

οἱ δ’ αὖ κυβερνῆται πρὸς τὸ τῆς νεὼς ἔσχατον χωρίον πρύμναν παρελθόντες πάντων ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν εἰσιν ἄριστοι τῶν ἐμπλεόντων, ἅτε τῆς νεὼς καὶ τῶν ἐν αὐτῇ τὴν σωτηρίαν ἐν χερσὶ ταῖς αὑτῶν ἔχοντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.76c. AD 75–95

καὶ οἱ μὲν οὕτως ἀφανίζονται πάντες, Νῶχος δὲ σώζεται μόνος ὑποθεμένου μηχανὴν αὐτῷ καὶ πόρον πρὸς σωτηρίαν τοῦ θεοῦ τοιαύτην·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.10c. AD 100

ἀκριβεύεσθαι οὖν ὀφείλομεν, ἀδελφοί, περὶ τῆς σωτηρίας ἡμῶν, ἵνα μὴ ὁ πονηρὸς παρείσδυσιν πλάνης ποιήσας ἐν ἡμῖν ἐκσφενδονήσῃ ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ τῆς ζωῆς ἡμῶν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 7th c. AD 4th c. AD

P.Worp 50Umm BaladAD 76–AD 125

Σωκράτης Ἱερωνύμῳ τῶι ἀδελφῶι χαίρειν. μὰ τὴν σὴν σωτηρίαν καὶ τὸν κύριον Ἄμμωνα … μὴ τὰ ἐν τῇ λατομίᾳ … οὐδὲ τῶι Ἀραβάρχηι

P.Mil.Vogl. 1 24Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 117

σεμνὸν κύριον καὶ ἀδελφόν. γράφεις μοι λέγων· ἐὰν δυνηθῇς ἀνάπλευσον· νὴ τὴν σήν μοι σωτηρίαν καὶ τὴν τοῦ τεκνίου μου καὶ ὀρθοποδίαν, ἧς πέπεισμαί σε κήδεσθαι οὐκ ἔλασσόν μου,

P.Stras. 7 605Ptolemais Euergetis (Arsinoites)AD 117–AD 138

γενήματα καὶ γένη καὶ κτ … … … τας οὔσας ἐν χρήσει παρὰ τῇ σωτηρίᾳ … … … τα ὑπʼ ἐμοῦ καταλειφθησόμενα … … … τατον βίον διη

“If however we are constricted, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation if we are encouraged, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation which is operating in [the] endurance of the same sufferings that also we ourselves suffer,”

τῆςho which G3588 Article · genitive · singular · feminine ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in 2 Corinthians as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-GSF — Article · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁwhich19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“If however we are constricted, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation if we are encouraged, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation which is operating in [the] endurance of the same sufferings that also we ourselves suffer,”

ἐνεργουμένηςenergeō is operating G1754 Verb · present · middle · participle · genitive · singular · feminine ¶

21× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 2 Corinthians than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

To be active means to be at work or in action, like God's power working in us or being mighty in something, as seen in Matthew 14:2 and Galatians 2:8.

Amplified meaning

works, brings about

Tyndale gloss

be active

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐνεργέω (i.e., *energeō*) means to be active or to work effectively. It is used in both transitive and intransitive forms, often referring to divine or supernatural action in the New Testament. The word conveys the idea of something being in operation or having an active principle at work, appearing in various contexts, including the workings of spiritual gifts and divine influence.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐνεργέω, -ῶ

[in LXX: Nu 8:24 B (עֲבֹדָה צְבׄא צָבָא ), Is 41:4, Pr 21:6 (פָּעַל), Pr 31:12 (גָּמַל), I Es 2:20, Wi 15:11 16:17 * ;]

(for full lexical treatment, v. AR, Eph., 243 ff.);

intrans., to be at work or in action, to operate (opp. to ἀργέω): seq. ἐν, c. dat. pers., Mt 14:2, Mk 6:14, Eph 2:2; c. dat. pers., seq. εἰς (Lft., in l), Ga 2:8.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐνεργέω, τῶ; 1 aor. ἐνήργησα; pt. ἐνήργηκα (Eph. i. 20 LT WH txt. Trmrg.); (ἐνεργός [see evepyqs]) ; a intrans. to be operative, be at work, put forth power: foll. by ἐν with dat. of pers., Mt. xiv. 2; Mk. vi. 14; Eph. ii. 2; foll. by the dat. of advantage (dat. com.; [ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. as below]), to work for one, aid one, εἴς τι, unto (the accomplishing of) something [W. 397 (371)]: εἰς ἀποστολήν; unto the assumption [or discharge] of the apostolic office; εἰς τὰ ἔθνη. i. 4: εἰς ἀποστολὴν [ef. W. § 66, 2d.; Β. 8 147, 8] τῶν ἐθνῶν, Gal. ii. 8. 2. trans. to effect: τί, 1 Co. xii. 11; [Eph. 1. 11]; ἐνεργεῖν ἐνέργειαν, Eph. i. 19 sq.; ri ἔν τινι, dat. of pers., 1 Co. xii. 6 [B. 124 (109)]; Gal. iii. 5; Phil. ii 13. 8. Mid., pres. ἐνεργοῦμαι ; [impf. ἐνηργούμην] ; (not found in the O. T. or in prof. auth., and in the N. T. used only by Paul and James [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. as…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐνεργέω seems always to have the idea of effective working: see s.v. ἐνέργεια, and cf. Robinson 21. p. 241 ff. The verb has begun in later Greek to be followed by a direct obj. in the acc. (cf. Proleg. p. 65), as in P Oxy XII. 1567 (iv/A.D.) according to the editors’ alternative reading—et Oaels εὗρεν τοῦτο τὸ τετράποδων (1 ---δον), ἐνεργήτω (/.—eltw) τοῦτό μοι ἔξω. For the intrans. use see P Giss I. 784 (ii/a.p.) καλῶς δὲ ποιήσεις Kai περὶ τὰ λοιπὰ ἐνεργήσασα, Vett. Val. p. 2267 ἐνεργήσει πρὸς τὸ ἀγαθὸν ἢ φαῦλον : cf. Gal 2, where, however, the trans. οἵ Πέτρῳ is uncertain, either “for Peter ’’ (RV), or perhaps better ‘‘by Peter” (Hort Christian Ecclesia, p. 85). On the possibility that in 1 Th 215 ἐνεργεῖται is pass. = ‘‘is set in operation,’ see Milligan Thess. ad /., and for a similar usage of ἐνεργουμένη in Jas 515 see Proleg. p. 156, ExpT xxvi. p. 381 ff. From the inscrr. we may…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐνεργέω (energeō) — be active.

ἐνεργ-έω,

to be in action or activity, operate, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; especially of divine or supernatural action, frequently in NT., τινί, ἔν τινι, [NT]:—middle, [NT]

2. to be efficacious, of drugs, [Refs 1st c.AD+]; to be effective, of troops, ταῖς σαρίσαις [Refs 2nd c.AD+]:—passive, to be the object of action, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; also, to be actualized, [Refs 3rd c.AD+]

II. transitive, effect, execute, πάντα κατὰ δύναμιν [Refs 2nd c.BC+]:—passive, to be actively carried on, ὁ πόλεμος ἐνηργεῖτο [Refs 2nd c.BC+]things executed, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]

III. in Medicine texts, of sexual intercourse, τὴν τοιαύτην πρᾶξιν -οῦσι μετρίως [Refs] in opere esse, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐνεργέω

energeo

from 1756; to be active, efficient:--do, (be) effectual (fervent), be

mighty in, shew forth self, work (effectually in).

see GREEK for 1756

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐνεργέω

v.

I work, accomplish, am operative

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐνεργέω energeō 21x

to effect, 1 Cor. 12:6, 11; Gal. 3:5; Eph. 1:11; Phil. 2:13; to put into operation, Eph. 1:20; absol. to be active, Mt. 14:2; Mk. 6:14; Eph. 2:2; in NT to communicate energy and efficiency, Gal. 2:8; pass. or mid. to come into activity, be actively developed; to be active, be in operation, towards a result, 2 Cor. 4:12; Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐνεργέω fut. ήσω from ἐνεργής to be in action, to operate, Arist.; so in Mid., NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Verb-PMP-GSF — Verb · present · middle · participle · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PMP-GSF Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Middle Mood: Participle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

48%working

working48% · 10×works14% · 3×at work5% · 1×operating5% · 1×having worked5% · 1×did5% · 1×he worked5% · 1×work5% · 1×other renderings10% · 2×

21 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 10 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

verb95%adverbial5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 21 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

θεόςGod, a godπαράκλησιςexhortation, entδύναμιςmight, power, ma

οὗτος

διάδέbut, on the othe

καίand, even, also, nam

πνεῦμαwind, breath, spὅς

δύναμιςmight, power, marvel

ὁArticle the

νόμοςa law, the Mosaic La

ὁArticle the

ἐνεργέωis operating21×

what comes after →

ἐν

ὁArticle theἐγώσύ

ὁArticle the

δύναμιςmight, power, maπᾶςall, the whole, εἷςone

ΠέτροςPeter

εἰς

καίand, even, also, nam

ἐγώ

δύναμιςmight, power, marvel

ἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐνεργέω · 21× in the New Testament

Ephesians Galatians 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Philippians 1 Thessalonians 2 Thessalonians Colossians James Matthew Mark Romans

Across the New Testament12 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἐν×δύναμιςmight, power, marvelous works×διά×ἀποστολήcommission, duty of apostle, apostleship×πνεῦμαwind, breath, spirit×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.20c. AD 40

διὰ τοῦτο ὁ φίλος τῶν αἰσθήσεων καὶ κατ’ αὐτὰς ἀλλὰ μὴ κατὰ νοῦν ἐνεργῶν Λάβαν ἀγανακτεῖ καὶ διώκει καί φησιν·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.155c. AD 75–95

καὶ λαβοῦσα τὴν ἀρχὴν τῆς ἑλίξεως κατὰ στέρνον καὶ περιελθοῦσα πάλιν δεῖται, καὶ κέχυται μὲν πολλὴ μέχρι καὶ τῶν σφυρῶν ἕως οὗ μηδὲν ὁ ἱερεὺς ἐνεργεῖ, πρὸς γὰρ εὐπρέπειαν οὕτως ἔχει τοῖς ὁρῶσι καλῶς, ὅταν δὲ σπουδάζειν περὶ τὰς θυσίας δέῃ καὶ…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.1c. AD 100

Ἡμερῶν οὖν οὐσῶν πονηρῶν καὶ αὐτοῦ τοῦ ἐνεργοῦντος ἔχοντος τὴν ἐξουσίαν, ὀφείλομεν ἑαυτοῖς προσέχοντες ἐκζητεῖν τὰ δικαιώματα κυρίου,

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD

CdÉ 41 (1966), p. 347-353Heptakomia (Apollonopolites)AD 114–AD 119

ὑγίειαν καὶ τὸν Ἑρμῆν τὸν κύριον, διακοσίας δραχμὰς ἐζημιώθην εἰς αὐτὰ διὰ τὸ μὴ ἐνεργεῖν αὐτά. καὶ Ἡράκλειος δὲ οἶδε καὶ θεωρεῖ πῶς ἐστιν ἀργὰ διὰ τὸ μηδένα προσέρχεσθαι

P.Bagnall 7Arsinoites (?)AD 101–AD 300

μῶν ἀκούει ἴσθι. περὶ τῶν τοῦ Σύρου ὑπαρχόντων μηδὲν πράξας ἄχρι νῦν μηκέτι μηδὲν ἐνέργει. περὶ μέντοι τῶν ἄλλων πράσσ ε ὅ τι ἂν δυνηθῇς ἐξαιρέτως περὶ τοῦ ἐν

P.Ant. 2 87Antinoopolis (?)AD 276–AD 300

τα … … … ρ … α … … … α καὶ ἐξ ἐνεργῶν ἀποδεῖξαι καίπερ μέχρι νῦν οὐ παρέστησαν ε … … ναι καὶ κατὰ τὰ ὑπομνήματα

“If however we are constricted, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation if we are encouraged, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation which is operating in [the] endurance of the same sufferings that also we ourselves suffer,”

ἐνen in G1722 Preposition ¶

2,743× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 2 Corinthians than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This word is a preposition that means in, on, or among something. It's used in many places, like Matthew 7:3 and Luke 7:37, to describe a location or relationship. It can also mean by, with, or during.

Tyndale gloss

in/on/among

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The most frequent preposition in the New Testament, 2,752 occurrences. In, on, at, among, within — its force comes almost entirely from the word it is attached to. What it does here is put the events inside a community rather than at a distance: they were fulfilled among us.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐν,

prep, (the most freq. of all in NT), c. dat. (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, c. abl.).

Of place, c. dat. rei, pers., in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Lk 7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mt 7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mt 12:40; τ. ὄρει, II Pe 1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Re 3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Ro 8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν , Lk 1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Ga 3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mt 12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103)…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (οἴ. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 544.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafied as it were in Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord: Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14; Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i. 1,13; ii-1; 1 Pet. iii. 16; v.10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; iva εὑρεθῶ ἐν αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ "Inc. 1 Co. i. 30; οἱ ἐν Xp. "Ina. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rey. xiv. 13. Since such union with Christ is the basis on which actions and virtues rest, the expression is…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐν 210 contract—time of Augustus) ἱμάτια γυναικεῖα ἐν apyv(plov) δραχμαῖς ἑκατόν, P Oxy IV. 7247 (A.D. 155) ἐξ ὧν ἔσχες τὴν πρώτην δόσιν ἐν δραχμαῖς τεσσαράκοντα, 70. I. 565 (A.D. 211) δανειζομένη. .. ἀργύριον ἔντοκον ἐν δραχμαῖς ἑξακισχειλίαις, and P Grenf II. 778 (iii/iv a.p.) (=Selections, Pp. 120) το]ὺς μισθοὺς. . ὄντας ἐν δραχμαῖς τριακοσίαις τεσσαράκοντα. Similar are P Oxy IV. 7084 (a.p. 188) yopou . . ἐν (1vpod)(apraBats) ’B, BGU 1. 724 (a.p. 191) ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε: with which may be compared Eph 2!° τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν, “consisting in.” In P Lond 9215 (ii/iii a.p.) (ΞΞ 111. P- 134) γεγονέναι ἐν ἀμπέλῳ = ‘to be planted with vines.” A predicative use of ἐν is seen in P Hib I. 421° (B.c. 262) δώσομεν Λευκίωι ἐν ὀφειλήματι, ‘asa debt,” P Petr I. 1215 (cf. II. p. 22) ὅσα δὲ ᾿Αξιοθέα προσενήνεγκται ἐμ φερνῆι, “ἐᾷς dowry,” and P Tebt I. 120 135…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐν (en) — in/on/among.

ἐν,

poetry ἐνί, εἰν, εἰνί [Refs 8th c.BC+], forms used by Epic dialect and Lyric Poets as the metre requires, but only as falsa lectio in Trag., εἰν [Refs 5th c.BC+] ἰν [Refs]

__PREP. WITH DAT. AND ACC. Radical sense, in, into.

__A WITH DAT.

__A.I OF PLACE,

__A.I.1 in, νήσῳ ἐν ἀμφιρύτῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with names of cities or islands, as ἐν Ἀθήνῃς, ἐν Τροίῃ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; where ἐν is used, it = in the district of.., ὲν Ἐλευσῖνι [Refs] in my arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν αὑτῷ εἶναι to be in one's senses, be oneself, ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτῷ (variant -τοῦ) γενοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.I.1.b ἐν τοῖς ἰχθύσιν in the fish-market, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐν τοῖν δυοῖν ὀβολοῖν ἐθεώρουν ἄν in the two-obol seats, [Refs 4th…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐν

en

a primary preposition denoting (fixed) position (in place, time or

state), and (by implication) instrumentality (medially or

constructively), i.e. a relation of rest (intermediate between 1519

and 1537); "in," at, (up-)on, by, etc.:--about, after, against, +

almost, X altogether, among, X as, at, before, between, (here-)by (+

all means), for (... sake of), + give self wholly to, (here-)in(-to,

-wardly), X mightily, (because) of, (up-)on, (open-)ly, X outwardly,

one, X quickly,

X shortly, (speedi-)ly, X that, X there(-in, -on),

through(-out), (un-)to(-ward), under, when, where(-with), while,

with(-in). Often used in compounds, with substantially the same

import; rarely with verbs of motion, and then not to indicate

direction, except (elliptically) by a separate (and different)

preposition.

see GREEK for 1519

see GREEK for 1537

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐν

Prep.

in, on, among

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐν en 2x

followed by the dat., in, Mt. 8:6; Mk. 12:26; Rev. 6:6,; upon, Lk. 8:32; among, Mt. 11:11; before, in the presence of, Mk. 8:38; in the sight, estimation of, 1 Cor. 14:11; before, judicially, 1 Cor. 6:2; in, of state, occupation, habit, Mt. 21:22; Lk. 7:25; Rom. 4:10; in the case of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐν

e)nprepe)ni/prep ei)nprep ei)ni/prep in, among. c. dat.

Lat. in.

PREP. WITH DAT.:

OF PLACE

in, ἐν νήσῳ, ἐν Τροίῃ, etc., Hom., etc.:—elliptic, ἐν Ἀλκινόοιο (sc. οἴκῳ) Od.; εἰν Ἀΐδαο Il.; ἐν παιδοτρίβου at the school of the training master, Ar.

in, upon, ἐν οὔρεσι Hom., etc.

in the number of, amongst, ἐν Δαναοῖς, etc., Hom.; and with Verbs of ruling, ἄρχειν, ἀνάσσειν ἐν πολλοῖς to be first or lord among many, i. e. over them, id. Hom.; cf. ὁ, τό B. III. 3.

in one's hands, within one's reach or power, Lat. penes, Hom., etc.; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Soph.; ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τέλος ἦν Dem.

in respect of, ἐν γήρᾳ in point of age, Soph.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

A principal thing to notice about this preposition, which in the King James Version represents about 16 Hebrew and as many Greek words and prepositions, is that, in hundreds of cases (especially in the Old Testament, but frequently also in the New Testament) in the Revised Version (British and American) the rendering is changed to more exact forms ("to," "unto," "by," "upon," "at," "with," "among," "for," "throughout," etc.; compare e.g. Ge 6:16; 13:8; 17:7,9,12; 18:1; Ex 8:17; Le 1:9, etc.); while, nearly as often, "in" is substituted for divergent forms of the King James Version (e.g. Ge 2:14; 17:11; 31:54; 40:7; 49:17; Ex…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

79%in

in79% · 2226×with5% · 135×among5% · 132×by4% · 112×on3% · 72×other renderings4% · 116×other renderings1% · 40×

2,833 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 36 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial82%predicate11%object3%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,743 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

καίand, even, also,πᾶςall, the whole, σύ

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςσύεἰμίI am, exist

αὐτός

καίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the othe

εἰμίI am, exist

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,οὐNeg

ἐγώ

μετάπατήρfather, Father, εἰς

ἐνin2743×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaἡμέραa dayκαρδίαthe heart, inner

αὐτός

καίand, even, also,ὁArticle theμένωI remain, abide

σύ

εἰμίI am, existμένωI remain, abideκαίand, even, also,

ὅς

καίand, even, also,εἰμίI am, existὁArticle the

πᾶςall, the whole, ever

ὁArticle theτόποςa placeσοφίαwisdom

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐν · 2,743× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew Acts John Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Revelation Mark Ephesians Colossians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

μένωI remain, abide×ἱερόςa temple×συναγωγήan assembly, congregation, synagogue×μέσοςmiddle, in the middle×ἔρημοςdeserted, desolate, a desert×

“If however we are constricted, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation if we are encouraged, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation which is operating in [the] endurance of the same sufferings that also we ourselves suffer,”

ὑπομονῇhupomonē [the] endurance G5281 Noun · dative · singular · feminine ¶

32× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 2 Corinthians than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Perseverance or endurance, like patiently waiting for something, as described in Luke 8:15 and Romans 5:3-4 where believers endure hardships with hope.

Amplified meaning

perseverance, steadfastness

Tyndale gloss

perseverance

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ὑπομονή is derived from ὑπομένω and means endurance or steadfastness. It encompasses patient waiting and the ability to withstand trials, often referenced in the New Testament, including in Luke and Romans. The lexicons note its use in both positive and negative contexts, with some suggesting a distinction between it and similar terms like μακροθυμία, though this distinction is debated.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — μακροθυμία, ὑπομονή, ἀνοχή from a scan

BETWEEN μακροθυμία and ὑπομονή, which occur together at Col. i. 11, and in the same context 2 Cor. vi. 4,6 ; 2 Tim. iii. 10; Jam. v. 10, 11 (cf. Clement of Rome, 64 ; Ignatius, Hphes. 8), Chrysostom draws the following distinction ; that a man paxpoθυμεῖ, who having power to revenge himself, yet refrains from the exercise of this power ; while he ὑπομένει, who having no choice but to bear, and only the alternative of a patient or impatient bearing, has grace to choose theformer. Thus the faithful, he concludes, would commonly be called to exercise the former grace among themselves (1 Cor. vi. 7), the latter in their commerce with those that were without: μακροθυμίαν πρὸς ἀλλήλους, ὑπομονὴν πρὸς τοὺς ἔξω" μακροθυμεῖ γάρ τις πρὸς ἐκείνους οὺς δυνατὸν καὶ ἀμύνασθαι, ὑπομένει δὲ ods οὐ δύναται ἀμύνασθαι. This distinction, however, will not endure a closer examination ; for see decisively…

Read the full entry →

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὑπο-μονή, -ῆς, ἡ

(ὑπομένω)

[in LXX for מִקְוֶה and cogn. forms; freq. in IV Mac ;]

a remaining behind (Arist.).

patient enduring, endurance: Lk 8:15 21:19, Ro 5:3, 4 15:4, 5, II Co 6:4 12:12, Col 1:11, II Th 1:4, I Ti 6:11, II Ti 3:10, Tit 2:2, He 10:36, Ja 1:3, 4 5:11, II Pe 1:6, Re…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὑπο-μονή, -7s, ἡ, (ὑπομένω) ; 1. steadfastness, constancy, endurance, (Vulg. in 1 Th. i. 3 sustinentia, in Jas. v. 11 sufferentia); in the N. T. the characteristic of a man who is unswerved from his deliberate purpose and his loyalty to faith and piety by even the greatest trials and sufferings: Lk. viii. 15; xxi. 19; Ro. v. 3 sq.; xv. 4 βα.; 2 Co. vi. 4; xii. 12; Col. i. 11; 2 Th.i.4; 1 Tim. vi. 11; 2 Tim. iii.10; Tit. ii. 2; Heb. x. 36; Jas. i. 3sq.; v.11; 2 Pet.i.6; Rev. ii. 2 sq. 19; xiii. 10; xiv. 12, (ef. 4 Mace. i. 11; ix. 8, 30; xv. 30 (27); xvii. 4, 12, 23); with agen. of the thing persevered in [W. § 30, 1 fin.]: τοῦ ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ, Ro. ii. 7; τῆς ἐλπίδος, 1 Th. i. 3 [ef. B. 155 (136)]; δὲ ὑπομονῆς, [with patience (cf. W. § 51, 1b.) 1. 6.1 patiently and steadfastly, Ro. viii. 25; Heb. xii. 1. 2. a patient, steadfast waiting for; [8]. question this sense in the New Test., and…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὑπομονή, τ ρξαάίαξε endurance,” denoting ‘‘an inward feeling, as well as outward conduct, but directed only towards aggression” (Hort ad Rev 25: cf. also Lightfoot /Vofes, p. 11, and Ropes 700 ad Jas 1%). Hence in late Jewish literature the word is frequently applied to the virtue shewn by martyrs, e.g. 4 Macc 11} θαυμασθέντες . . . ἐπὶ τῇ ἀνδρίᾳ καὶ τῇ ὑπομονῇ : cf Pss. Sol. ii. 40 ὅτι χρηστὸς 6 κύριος τοῖς ἐπικαλουμένοις αὐτὸν ἐν ὑπομονῇ. In Zest. χἕΐ. ῥαΐγ. Jos. x. I ὁρᾶτε. .. πόσα κατεργάζεται ἡ ὑπομονή, the reference is to resistance to the wiles of the Egyptian woman.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὑπομονή (hupomonē) — perseverance.

ὑπομονή, ἡ,

remaining behind, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

II. endurance, τῶν ἀκουσίων πόνων [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [θανάτου] [Refs 1st c.AD+]; ἡ τῆς μαχαίρας ὑ. τῶν πληγῶν the sword's power to sustain blows, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]

II.2. in bad sense, obstinacy, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]

II.3. of plants, power to endure, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

III. enduring to do, αἰσχρῶν ἔργων [Refs]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὑπομονή

hupomone

from 5278; cheerful (or hopeful) endurance, constancy:--enduring,

patience, patient continuance (waiting).

see GREEK for 5278

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὑπομονή, ῆς, ἡ

n.f.

endurance, steadfastness

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὑπομονή hypomonē 32x

patient endurance, 2 Cor. 12:12; Col. 1:11; patient awaiting, Lk. 21:19; a patient frame of mind, patience, Rom. 5:3, 4; 15:4, 5; Jas. 1:3; perseverance, Rom. 2:7; endurance in adherence to an object, 1 Thess. 1:3; 2 Thess. 3:5; Rev. 1:9; ἐν ὑπομονῇ and δι’ ὑπομονῆς, constantly, perseveringly, Lk. 8:15; Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὑπομονή ὑπομονή, ἡ, ὑπομένω a remaining behind, Arist.

a holding out, patient endurance, id. Arist.:— the enduring to do, αἰσχρῶν ἔργων Theophr.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-DSF — Noun · dative · singular · feminine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

Nave's Topical Bible

→ See PERSEVERANCE

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

63%endurance

endurance63% · 20×perseverance25% · 8×patient endurance6% · 2×patience3% · 1×steadfastness3% · 1×

32 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial47%object34%subject19%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 32 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

καίand, even, also,ἀγάπηloveἐν

ἐν

καρποφορέωI bear fruitἐνεργέωI work, accompliδιάκονοςa waiter, servan

δέbut, on the other ha

ὁArticle the

διά

ἐλπίζωI hope, hope forἁμαρτίαa sin

πᾶςall, the whole, ever

ἐνεἰς

ὑπομονή[the] endurance32×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

αὐτόςἐλπίςhope, expectatioΧριστόςanointed, the Me

σύ

καίand, even, also,κτάομαιI win, get, buy,

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theδιάμακροθυμίαpatience, forbea

ἔργονwork, labor, action,

ἀγαθόςgoodτέλειοςperfect, full-gr

ἐν

δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὑπομονή · 32× in the New Testament

Revelation Romans 2 Corinthians James 2 Peter 2 Thessalonians Hebrews Luke 1 Thessalonians 1 Timothy 2 Timothy Colossians

Across the New Testament13 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

διά×ἀγάπηlove×πίστιςfaith, belief, trust×ἔργονwork, labor, action, deed×θλῖψιςpersecution, affliction, distress×κατεργάζομαιI work out, produce, accomplish×εὐσέβειαpiety, godliness×ὧδεhere×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

אֶ֫רֶץn. f. & (seld.) m. earth, land100%H776 · 4 verses

Counted over the 4 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome Polycarp The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Cherubim 78c. AD 40

τλῆναι γὰρ ἔδει καὶ ἀντιτάξασθαι καὶ ἀντερείσασθαι γνώμην ὀχυρωσάμενον καὶ ἀναφραξάμενον τῇ ἑαυτοῦ καρτερίᾳ καὶ ὑπομονῇ, δυνατωτάταις ἀρεταῖς.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.7c. AD 75–95

οὐδενὸς γὰρ ὅλως ὑστέρουν, ἀλλὰ καὶ πρὸς ἔργα χειρῶν καὶ πόνων ὑπομονὴν ἦσαν εὔψυχοι καὶ δεινοὶ συνιέναι.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.2c. AD 100

τῆς οὖν πίστεως ἡμῶν εἰσιν βοηθοὶ φόβος καὶ ὑπομονή, τὰ δὲ συμμαχοῦντα ἡμῖν μακροθυμία καὶ ἐγκράτεια:

“If however we are constricted, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation if we are encouraged, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation which is operating in [the] endurance of the same sufferings that also we ourselves suffer,”

τῶνho of the G3588 Article · genitive · plural · neuter ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in 2 Corinthians as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-GPN — Article · genitive · plural · neuter
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GPN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ov:

(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]

1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.

I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.

For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.

It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.

Lamentations 3:1.

The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.

Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.

That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.

Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁof the19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“If however we are constricted, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation if we are encouraged, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation which is operating in [the] endurance of the same sufferings that also we ourselves suffer,”

αὐτῶνautos same G846 Personal pronoun · genitive · plural · neuter ¶

5,550× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

rarer in 2 Corinthians than elsewhere in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This pronoun refers to a person or thing, like 'he', 'she', or 'it'. It is used in the Bible to emphasize a person or thing, like in John 2:25 where it says 'he himself knew'.

Tyndale gloss

it/s/he

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐτός, -ή, -ό,

determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).

Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);

self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.

αὐτός

(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),

I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐτός

autos

from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea

of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used

(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the

proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,

the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-

)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,

- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),

those, together, very, which. Compare 848.

see GREEK for 109

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 848

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό

Pers.pr.

he, she, it, they, them, same

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐτός autos 5x

self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:

oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.

of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.

by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.

in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Pron-GPN — Personal pronoun · genitive · plural · neuter
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-GPN Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

52%him

him52% · 3025×them25% · 1488×it6% · 323×her4% · 250×other renderings10% · 587×other renderings3% · 188×

5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

object33%adverbial28%indirect object19%subject18%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

λέγωI say, speak

καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus

πρός

λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goδέbut, on the othe

ἐν

ὁArticle theαὐτόςεὑρίσκωI find

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakοὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςσύθεόςGod, a god

αὐτόςsame5550×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἸησοῦςJesusμαθητήςa learner, disciθεόςGod, a god

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast

ἐν

ὁArticle theαὐτόςὅς

εἰς

ὁArticle theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnesἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐτός · 5,550× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew John Mark Acts Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians

19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἐπερωτάωI interrogate, question, demand of×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος

“If however we are constricted, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation if we are encouraged, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation which is operating in [the] endurance of the same sufferings that also we ourselves suffer,”

παθημάτωνpathēma sufferings G3804 Noun · genitive · plural · neuter ¶

16× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 2 Corinthians than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Suffering or hardship, like pain or affliction, as experienced by Christ and shared by Christians, as seen in Romans 8:18 and 2 Corinthians 1:6-7.

Amplified meaning

hardships, trials

Tyndale gloss

suffering

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

πάθημα (pathema) refers to suffering or affliction, derived from the verb meaning to suffer. It encompasses both external hardships and internal emotions or passions. In the New Testament, it is notably used to describe the sufferings of Christ and the afflictions faced by Christians (e.g., Romans 8:18, 2 Corinthians 1:6). The term is often found in the plural form, indicating multiple instances of suffering.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

* πάθημα, -τος, τό

(< πάσχω), like πάθος,

that which befalls one, a suffering, affliction: pl., Ro 8:18, II Co 1:6, 7, Col 1:24, II Ti 3:11, He 2:10 10:32, I Pe 5:9; of Christ's sufferings: τὰ εἰς Χ., I Pe 1:11; τ. Χριστσῦ, I Pe 5:1; id. as shared by Christians, II Co 1:5, Phl 3:10, I Pe 4:13.

a passive emotion, affection, passion: Ga 5:24; τ. ἁμαρτιῶν, Ro 7:5.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πάθημα, -ros, τό, (fr. παθεῖν, πάσχω, as μάθημα fr. paθεῖν), fr. [Soph.,] Hdt. down; 1. that which one suffers or has suffered; a. externally, a suffering, misfortune, calamity, evil, affliction: plur., Ro. viii. 18; 2 Co. i. 6 sq.; Col. i. 24; 2 Tim. iii. 11; Heb. 11. 10; x. 32; 1 Pet. v.95; τὰ εἰς Χριστόν, that should subsequently come unto Christ [W. 193 (182)], 1 Pet. i. 11; τοῦ Χριστοῦ, which Christ endured, 1 Pet. v. 1; also the afflictions which Christians must undergo in behalf of the same cause for which Christ patiently endured, are called παθήματα τοῦ Χριστοῦ [W. 189 (178) note], 2 Co. i. 5; Phil. iii. 10; 1 Pet. iv. 13. b. of an inward state, an affection, passion: Gal. v. 24; τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν, that lead to sins, Ro. vii. 5. 2. i. g. τὸ πάσχειν (see καύχημα, 2), an enduring, undergoing, suffering, (so the plur. in Arstph. thesm. 199) : θανάτου, gen. of the obj., Heb. ii. 9.…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πάθημα (pathēma) — suffering.

πᾰθ-ημα, ατος, τό,

dative plural παθημάτοις [Refs]:—that which befalls one, suffering, misfortune, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ π. τοῦ Χριστοῦ the passion of Christ, [NT]; of good fortune, χαῖρε παθὼν τὸ π. (deification) [Refs 5th c.AD+]: mostly in plural, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀκούσια π., opposed to ἑκούσια καὶ ἐκ προνοίας ἀδικήματα, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ δέ μοι π. μαθήματα γέγονε my sufferings have been my lessons [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. emotion or condition, affection, π. τῆς ψυχῆς εἶναι τὴν σωφροσύνην, οὐ μάθημα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; opposed to ποίημα, [Refs 3rd c.AD+]; but in early writers mostly in plural, affections, feelings, opposed to ποιήματα, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; παθήμασιν ὑπηρετεῖν obey the feelings, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; opposed to…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

πάθημα

pathema

from a presumed derivative of 3806; something undergone, i.e. hardship

or pain; subjectively, an emotion or influence:-- affection,

affliction, motion, suffering.

see GREEK for 3806

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πάθημα, ατος, τό

n.n.

suffering, passion

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πάθημα pathēma 16x

what is suffered; suffering, affliction, Rom. 8:18; 2 Cor. 1:5, 6, 7; Phil. 3:10; emotion, passion, Rom. 7:5; Gal. 5:24

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πάθημα πά^θημα, ατος, τό, παθεῖν anything that befals one, a suffering, calamity, misfortune, Soph., Thuc.: mostly in pl., Hdt., attic; proverb., τὰ δέ μοι παθήματα μαθήματα γέγονε my sufferings have been my lessons, Hdt.

a passive emotion or condition, Xen., Plat.

in pl. incidents, occurrences, Plat.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-GPN — Noun · genitive · plural · neuter
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GPN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

81%sufferings

sufferings81% · 13×passions13% · 2×suffering6% · 1×

16 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial44%subject31%object19%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 16 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

σάρξflesh, bodyἄξιοςworthy, worthy oπερισσεύωI exceed, am lef

Χριστόςanointed, the Messia

ὁArticle theεἰς

αὐτός

ὁArticle the

κοινωνίαparticipation, commu

καίand, even, also,

διά

αὐτός

πάθημαsufferings16×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἁμαρτίαa sinνῦνnow, already, atΧριστόςanointed, the Me

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle the

ὅς

καίand, even, also,

οὕτωthus, so, in this ma

καίand, even, also,

αὐτός

συμμορφίζωI bring to the s

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπάθημα · 16× in the New Testament

1 Peter 2 Corinthians Hebrews Romans 2 Timothy Colossians Galatians Philippians

Across the New Testament8 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

Χριστόςanointed, the Messiah, the Christ×χαίρωI rejoice, am glad×διά×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 70c. AD 40

καὶ πάλιν πτηνὸς ἀρθεὶς καὶ τὸν ἀέρα καὶ τὰ τούτου παθήματα κατασκεψάμενος ἀνωτέρω φέρεται πρὸς αἰθέρα καὶ τὰς οὐρανοῦ περιόδους, πλανήτων τε καὶ ἀπλανῶν χορείαις συμπεριποληθεὶς κατὰ τοὺς μουσικῆς τελείας νόμους, ἑπόμενος ἔρωτι σοφίας ποδηγετοῦντι,…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.299c. AD 75–95

Φαραώθης δὲ ἅμα τοῦ τε πάθους ἀπήλλακτο ἡ γῆ καὶ τῆς αἰτίας ἐπελέληστο καὶ τοὺς Ἑβραίους κατεῖχε, καὶ ὥσπερ πλειόνων παθημάτων φύσεις βουλόμενος μαθεῖν οὐκέτʼ ἠφίει τοῖς περὶ τὸν Μωυσῆν ἐξιέναι φόβῳ μᾶλλον ἢ φρονήσει ταύτην αὐτοῖς ἐπιτρέπων.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 2.1c. AD 96

τοῖς ἐφοδίοις τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἀρκούμενοι, καὶ προσέχοντες τοὺς λόγους αὐτοῦ ἐπιμελῶς ἐνεστερνισμένοι ἥτε τοῖς σπλάγχνοις, καὶ τὰ παθήματα αὐτοῦ ἦν πρὸ ὀφθαλμῶν ὑμῶν.

“If however we are constricted, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation if we are encouraged, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation which is operating in [the] endurance of the same sufferings that also we ourselves suffer,”

ὧνhos, hē that G3739 Relative pronoun · genitive · plural · neuter ¶

1,407× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in 2 Corinthians as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The word which is a pronoun used to ask for or identify something, as seen in John 5:11. It can also be used to describe a person or thing, such as in Mark 15:23. This word helps to clarify or specify what is being talked about.

Tyndale gloss

which

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ὅς is a pronoun meaning 'who,' 'which,' 'what,' or 'that.' It serves as both a demonstrative and a relative pronoun, agreeing in gender with its antecedent. The New Testament uses it in various constructions, including phrases like ὃς μὲν... ὃς δέ to indicate contrasting subjects. Notably, it can express purpose or cause in certain contexts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,

the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν).

As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, freq. in Plat.), Mk 15:23, Jo 5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mt 21:35 22:5 25:15, Lk 23:33, Ac 27:14, Ro 14:5, I Co 11:21, II Co 2:16, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mt 13:8, 23, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὅς 455 ὅς iii. 5 [RG], 6; Heb. vi. 10; ix. 20; Jas. ii. 5; 1 In. iii. 24; Jude 15; for other exx. see below; ἐν ὥρᾳ 7 οὐ γινώoxet, Mt. xxiv. 50; τῇ παραδύσει 9 παρεδώκατε, Mk. vii. 13 ; add, Lk. ii. 20; v. 9; ix. 435 xii. 46; xxiv. 25; Jn. xvii. 5; Acts ii. 22; xvii. 31; xx. 38; 2 Co. xii. 21; 2Th.i. 4; Rev. xviii. 6; ef. W. § 24,1; [B. as above]. Rarely attraction oceurs where the verb governs the dative [but see below]: thus, κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσε θεοῦ for xarévavre θεοῦ, ᾧ ἐπίστευσε (See κατέναντι). Ro. iv. 17; φωνῆς, ἧς ἔκραξα (for 7 (al. ἥν, οἴ. W. 164 (154 sq.) Β. 287 (217)}7), Acts xxiv. 21, οἵ. Is. vi. 4; (7γετο δὲ καὶ τῶν ἑαυτοῦ τε πιστῶν, οἷς ἥδετο καὶ ὧν ἠπίστει πολλούς, for καὶ πολλοὺς τούτων, οἷς ἠπίστει, Xen. Cyr. ὅ, 4, 39; ὧν ἐγὼ ἐντετύχηκα οὐδείς; for οὐδεὶς τούτων, οἷς ἐντετ. Plato, Gorg. p. 509 ἃ.; Protag. p. 361 6.; derep.7 p.531e.; παρ᾽ ὧν βοηθεῖς, οὐδεμίαν λήψει…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ος is found as a demonstrative pronoun in P Ryl II. 14415 (complaint of assault—a.D. 38) ὃς δὲ ἐκ τοῦ ἐναντίου ἄλογον ἀηδίαν μοι ἐπιχειρήσας παρεχρήσατό μοι πολλὰ καὶ ἄσχημα, ‘“whereupon he opposing me made a brutal and odious attack upon me and subjected me to much shameful mishandling” (Edd.): cf. Mk 15%, Jn 51. For ὃς μέν... ὃς δέ, “the one . . the other,” as in Mt 21° a/., see P Oxy IX. 1189? (c. A.D. 117) ἐπιστολὰς δύο ds ἔγραψα ἣν μὲν σοὶ ἣν δὲ Σαβείνῳ, and for ὃς δέ solétarium see PSI. IV. 313° (iii/iv A.D.) with the editor’s note. Ὃς ἄν (ἐάν) c. conj. = ‘‘ whosoever ” may be illustrated Ly P Par 4622 (B.c. 153) (= Witkowski*, p. 87), περὶ dv ἂν βούληι γράφε, P Grenf I. 30% (B.c. 103) ἐφ} οἷς ἂν οὖν ὑμῶν προσδέωνται, P Oxy IV. 743%% (B.C. 2) ἐν ols ἐὰν σοῦ προσδέηται, °° ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐὰν θέλῃς. For the comparative usage of ὃς ἄν and ὃς ἐάν, see Thackeray Gr. i. p. 68, cited s.v. ἄν.…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὅς (hos, hē) — which.

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,

genitive οὗ, ἧς, οὗ, etc.; dative plural οἷς, αἷς, οἷς, etc.: Epic dialect forms, genitive ὅου (probably replacing Οο) in the phrases ὅου κλέος οὔ ποτ᾽ ὀλεῖται [Refs 8th c.BC+]; feminine ἕης [Refs 8th c.BC+]; elsewhere only ἧς [Refs]; dative plural οἷς, οἷσι, ᾗς, ᾗσι (never αἷς or αἷσι in [Refs 8th c.BC+] — _pronoun_ used,

__A as demonstrative by the side of οὗτος, ὅδε, and the Article ὁ, ἡ, τό: in post-Homeric Gr. this use survived only in a few special phrases.

__B as a Relat. by the side of the Article ὅ, ἥ, τό (see. ὁ, ἡ, τό, c):—this demonstrative and Relat. pronoun must not be confounded with the Possess. ὅς, ἥ, ὅν. (With Gr. Relat. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ cf. Sanskrit Relat. yas, yā, yad, Lithuanian jis, ji (he, she), Oslav. i, ja, je (he, she…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὅς ἥ ὅ

hos

he hay, and neuter

ho ho

probably a primary word (or perhaps a form of the article 3588); the

relatively (sometimes demonstrative) pronoun, who, which, what,

that:--one, (an-, the) other, some, that, what, which, who(-m, -se),

etc. See also 3757.

see GREEK for 3588

see GREEK for 3757

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ

Rel.pr.

who, which, what, that

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὅς hos 1x

who, which, what, that, Mt. 1:16, 23, 25; in NT interrog. ἐφ’ ὅ, wherefore, why, Mt. 26:50; in NT ὅς μὲν ... ὅς δέ, for ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, Mt. 21:35; 2 Cor. 2:16

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Rel-GPN — Relative pronoun · genitive · plural · neuter
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

R-GPN Part of Speech: Relative pronoun Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

25%which

which25% · 356×whom20% · 291×who17% · 238×that14% · 199×what8% · 117×whatever2% · 30×whose2% · 29×other renderings10% · 145×other renderings2% · 25×

1,430 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 60 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

object40%subject29%adverbial26%indirect object3%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,407 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ἐν

ἡμέραa dayαὐτόςἵναin order that, s

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςἔχωI have, hold, poυἱόςa son, descenden

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakἀπόλλυμιI destroy, lose,δοῦλος (II)

διά

ἐκεῖνοςΧριστόςanointed, the Meαὐτός

εἰς

καίand, even, also,ἐγώοἰκίαa house, househo

ὅςthat1407×

what comes after →

εἰμίI am, exist

ὁArticle theμεθερμηνεύωI translate, intκαίand, even, also,

οὐNeg

εἰμίI am, existἔξεστι(ν)it is permitted,γινώσκωI come to know,

ὁArticle the

θεόςGod, a godυἱόςa son, descendenκύριοςlord, Lord, mast

καίand, even, also, nam

σύποιέωI do, makeαὐτός

δέbut, on the other ha

ἄνDisjἑξήκονταIndecτριάκονταIndec

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὅς · 1,407× in the New Testament

Acts Luke John Matthew Romans Mark Hebrews Revelation 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Colossians Ephesians

22 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἄνDisj×ἄχριas far as, up to, until×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 33c. AD 40

ἵν’ οὖν μὴ αἰεὶ συμφερόμεναι στασιάζωσι καὶ πόλεμος ἀντ’ εἰρήνης ἐπικρατῇ τὴν ἀκοσμίαν ἐν κόσμῳ τιθείς, οὐ μόνον ἐχώρισε φῶς καὶ σκότος, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὅρους ἐν μέσοις ἔθετο διαστήμασιν, οἷς ἀνεῖρξε τῶν ἄκρων ἑκάτερον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

πῶς τὸ Σοδομιτῶν ἔθνος θεὸς κατεστρέψατο χολωθεὶς αὐτοῖς ἐφ' οἷς ἡμάρτανον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.8c. AD 100

Μωϋσῆ Μωϋσῆ, κατάβηθι τὸ τάχος, ὅτι ἠνόμησεν ὁ λαός σου, οὓς ἐξήγαγες ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, καὶ συνῆκεν Μωϋσῆς καὶ ἔριψεν τὰς δύο πλάκας ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ: καὶ συνετρίβη αὐτῶν ἡ διαθήκη, ἵνα ἡ τοῦ ἠγαπημένου Ἰησοῦ ἐγκατασφραγισθῇ εἰς τὴν καρδίαν ἡμῶν…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC

P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ Ψενανοῦπιν καὶ … … ελθεῖν ἐπὶ προ … ους καὶ γραψάτωσαν ἡμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐσπούδασας διὰ τὰς ἡμῶν παρακλήσεις καὶ ση

P.Adl. 15Pathyris (?)101 BC

ἐδάνεισεν Ὧρος Ὥρου Ὥρωι Νεχούτου ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος μελίχρως ὑποκλαστὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὖς ἀριστερὸν τετρημένον πυροῦ ἀρτάβας τεσσαράκοντα ἓξ κριθῆς ἑξήκοντα ἐννέα , ἴσους ἀτόκους, ὧν ἀπόδοσιν

P.Adl. 17Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC

τῆς ἐπιγονῆς τῶν ἐκ Παθύρεως ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος μελίχρως τετανὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὖς ἀριστερὸν τετρημένον χαλκοῦ ταλάντων πέντε . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην

“If however we are constricted, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation if we are encouraged, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation which is operating in [the] endurance of the same sufferings that also we ourselves suffer,”

καὶkai also G2532 Conjunction ¶

8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in 2 Corinthians as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.

Tyndale gloss

and

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ol'-so: In the Greek kai, when it is equivalent to "also" or "even," is always placed before the word or phrase which it is intended to emphasize (e.g. Ac 12:3; 1 Joh 4:21). Mt 6:14 should therefore read, "Your heavenly Father will forgive you also"; Lu 6:13, "Whom also he named apostles"; Heb 8:6, "The mediator of a better covenant also"; and 1Th 4:14, `If we believe that Jesus died and rose again, so also (we believe that) those who are fallen asleep in Jesus, God will bring with Him.'

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

89%and

and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

αὐτός

ἐνἐπίπρός

σύ

χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,

ἐγώ

πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god

εἰμίI am, exist

αὐτόςὁArticle theἐγώ

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe

καίalso8978×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςὁArticle theπρός

οὐNeg

εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a

ὁράωI see, look upon, ex

ὁArticle theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei

ἐν

ὁArticle theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

“If however we are constricted, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation if we are encouraged, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation which is operating in [the] endurance of the same sufferings that also we ourselves suffer,”

ἡμεῖςegō we ourselves G3165 Personal pronoun · first person · nominative · plural ¶

1,872× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

In plain English

Tyndale gloss

I/we

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐγώ, gen, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς,

pers. pron.

I.

The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mt 3:11, Mk 1:8, Lk 3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mt 10:16, Jo 10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. I Ki 3:8), Ac 9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jo 1:23 (LXX), Ac 7:32 (LXX).

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐγώ, gen. ἐμοῦ, enclitic pod; dat. ἐμοί, enclitic μοί; acc. ἐμέ, enclitic μέ; plur. ἡμεῖς, ete.; personal pronoun, J. 1. The nominatives ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, when joined to a verb, generally have force and emphasis, or indicate antithesis, as Mt. iii. 11; Mk.i. 8; Lk. iii. 16 (ἐγὼ pev... ὁ δέ); Mt. iii. 14 (ἐγὼ... ἔχω, καὶ σύν ; V. 22, 28, 39, and often; ἡμεῖς, contrasted with God, Mt. vi. 12; ἡμεῖς x. of Φαρισαῖοι, Mt. ix. 14; cf. W. § 22,6. But sometimes they are used where there is no emphasis or antithesis in them, as Mt. x. 16; Jn. x. 17; and in many edd. in Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27; οἵ. B. §129, 12. ἰδοὺ ἐγώ, 1397, behold me, hereamT: Acts ix.10 (1S. iii. 8). ἐγώ, like 38, Jam: Jn. i. 23; Acts vii. 32, [ef. W.585 (544); B. 125 (109)]. 2. The enclitic (and monosyllabic) gen., dat., and ace. are connected with nouns, verbs, adverbs, but not with prepositions: ἔμπροσθέν pov, Jn. i. 15; ὀπίσω…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐγώ. Deissmann (ZAZ p. 134 ff.) has drawn attention to the parallels to the solemn use of the first personal pronoun in the Fourth Gospel that may be adduced from inscriptions and magical texts. Thus in an inscr. in honour of Isis from Ios, written in ii/iii A.p., the contents of which are preChristian, we find —Elows ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ τ[ύρανν]ος πάσης χόρας.. ἐγὼ νόμους ἀνθρώποις ἐθέμην . . ἐγώ εἰμι Kpdvov θυγάτηρ πρεσβυτάτη α΄. And similarly in the magical papyrus P Lond 4645 (iv/a.p.) (=I. p. 69) ἐγώ εἰμι ὃ ἀκέφαλος δαίμων . . ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ ἀλήθεια ὁ μεισῶν ἀδικήματα γείνεσθαι ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ α΄. With the construction of the phrase τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ; in Jn 24 we may compare BGU IV. 1141°8 (n.c. 14) ἐδίδουν αὐτῷ διαστολὰς μηδὲν αὐτῶι καὶ ἐκείνωι εἶναι : for its meaning see Ε΄. C. Burkitt in 77:5 xiii. p- 594f., where it is rendered, ‘‘ What have I and thou to do with that ?” On the difficult…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μέ (me) — me.

ἐγώ,

I: pronoun of the first person:—Epic dialect mostly ἐγών before vowels (so in Doric dialect, before consonants, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἱών [Refs 2nd c.AD+]:— strengthened ἔγωγε, I at least, for my part, indeed, for myself (more frequently in Attic dialect than in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Doric dialect ἐγώνγα [Refs 7th c.BC+]: Boeotian dialect ἱώνγα [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἱώνει [Refs]; ἰώγα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: Laconian dialect and Tarentum dialect ἐγώνη, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

II. oblique cases from a different root, genitive ἐμοῦ, enclitic μο; Ionic dialect and Epic dialect ἐμέο, ἐμεῦ, μευ, also ἐμέθεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect ἔμεθεν [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect ἐμέος, ἐμεῦς, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἐμοῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+] — _dative_ ἐμοί, enclitic μοι (which may be compared with Sanskrit…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐγώ

me

a shorter (and probably originally) from of 1691; me:--I, me, my.

see GREEK for 1691

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐγώ egō 2x

I, gen., ἐμοῦ [μου], dat., ἐμοί [μοι], acc., ἐμέ [με]

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Pron-1NP — Personal pronoun · first person · nominative · plural
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-1NP Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: first Case: Nominative Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

35%us

us35% · 717×me32% · 644×mine20% · 402×we ourselves6% · 124×my2% · 45×other renderings5% · 97×

2,029 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 27 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

“If however we are constricted, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation if we are encouraged, [it is] for <the> your comfort and salvation which is operating in [the] endurance of the same sufferings that also we ourselves suffer,”

πάσχομεν,paschō suffer, G3958 Verb · present · active · indicative · first person · plural ¶

40× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in 2 Corinthians as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

To suffer means to experience pain or hardship, as seen in Luke 22:15 and Acts 1:3. It can also refer to enduring misfortunes or difficulties, such as those faced by Jesus and the apostles.

Amplified meaning

undergo, suffer

Tyndale gloss

to suffer

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

πάσχω (paschō) means to suffer or be affected by something, often with a focus on negative experiences. It can also refer to positive experiences when qualified by an adjective. The New Testament frequently uses it in contexts of suffering, such as in Luke 22:15 and 1 Peter 2:19. The word is built from the root meaning to receive an impression, and it appears in various forms across Greek literature.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πάσχω,

[in LXX: Am 6:6 (חלה ni.), Wi 12:27, Si 38:16, al.;]

to suffer, be acted on, as opp. to acting, often limited by a word expressive of good or evil;

of misfortunes (most freq. without any limiting word): absol., Lk 22:15 24:46, Ac 1:3 3:18 17:3, I Co 12:26, He 2:18 9:26 13:12, I Pe 2:19, 20, 23 3:17 4:15, 19; seq. ὑπό, c. gen., Mt 17:12; ὑπέρ, Ac 9:16, Phl 1:20, II Th 1:5,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πάσχω; 2 aor. ἔπαθον : pf. πέπονθα (Lk. xiii. 2; Heb. ii. 18); fr. Hom. down; to be affected or have been affected, to feel, have a sensible experience, to undergo; it is a vox media— used in either a good or a bad sense; as, ὅσα πεπόνθασι καὶ ὅσα αὐτοῖς ἐγένετο, of perils and deliverance from them, Esth. ix. 26 (for AN); hence κακῶς πάσχειν, to suffer sadly, be in bad plight, of a sick person, Mt. xvii. 15 where L Tr txt. WH txt. x. ἔχειν (on the other hand, εὖ πάσχειν, to be well off, in good case, often in Grk. writ. fr. Pind. down). 1. in a bad sense, of misfortunes, to suffer, to undergo evils, to be afflicted, (so everywhere in Hom. and Hes.; also in the other Grk. writ. where it is used absol.): absol., Lk. xxii. 15; xxiv. 46; Acts i. 8; iii. 18; xvii. 3; 1 Co. xii. 26; Heb. ii. 18; ix. 26; 1 Pet. ii. 19 sq. 23; iii. 17; iv. 15,19; Heb. xiii. 12; ὀλίγον, a little while, 1 Pet. v.…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πάσχω. For the neutral sense of this verb ‘fam acted upon,” “experience,” as in Mt 1715 (v. /.), cf. the common euphemism ἐάν te πάσχω with reference to death, e.g. P Eleph 23 (B.c. 285-4) ἐὰν δέ τι πάσχηι Διονύσιος, P Petr [. 149 (4 Will—s.c. 237) ἐὰν δέ τι] ἀνθρώπινον πάσχω καταλιμπάνω τὰ ὑπίάρχοντα KTA., and P Ryl Il. 68% (B.c. 89) where ἐὰν μέν τι πάθω is contrasted with ἐὰν δὲ In a deed of divorce. P Flor Ζ (εν rive. περιγένωμαι, “11 survive.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πάσχω (paschō) — to suffer.

πάσχω,

[Refs 8th c.BC+]: imperfect ἔπασχον [Refs]: future πείσομαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Doric dialect 3rd.pers. singular παισεῖται [Refs 3rd c.BC+]: aorist ἔπᾰθον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: perfect πέπονθα [Refs 8th c.BC+]pluperfect ἐπεπόνθειν[Refs]; Attic dialect ἐπεπόνθη [Refs 5th c.BC+] (all the above tenses in [Refs 8th c.BC+], present and aorist only in [Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect πέπασθε (so [Refs 8th c.BC+]; feminine perfect participle πεπᾰθυῖα [Refs]; Doric dialect perfect πέποσχα [Refs 7th c.BC+]:—have something done to one, suffer, opposed to do, ὅσσ᾽ ἔρξαν τ᾽ ἔπαθόν τε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δρᾶν καὶ πάσχειν, see at {δρά; πολλὰ μὲν.. πείσεσθαι}, πολλὰ δὲ ποιήσειν [Refs 5th c.BC+]passive of ποιέω compare [Refs 4th c.BC+] to be treated so and so by another, suffer it at his hands, ἃ πάσχοντες ὑφ᾽ ἑτέρων ὀργίζεσθε, ταῦτα τοὺς ἄλλους μὴ ποιεῖτε [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

πάσχω,pavscw

"3958 pascho {pas'-kho} 包括 (patho {path'-o} 和 pentho {pen'-tho})

patho path'-o, and

pentho pen'-tho, used only in certain tenses for it

apparently a primary verb; to experience a sensation or impression

(usually painful):--feel, passion, suffer, vex.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πάσχω

v.

I am acted upon, suffer

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πάσχω paschō 42x

to be affected by a thing, whether good or bad, to suffer, endure evil, Mt. 16:21; 17:12, 15; 27:19; absol. to suffer death, Lk. 22:15; 24:26

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πάσχω radical sense, to receive an impression from without, to suffer, as opp. to doing, ἔρξαν τ᾽ ἔπαθόν τε Od.; δρᾶν καὶ πάσχειν, etc.; ὁμοίως π. τινί to be in the same case with . . , Hdt.

the sense is often limited by some word expressing good or evil:

κακῶς πάσχειν to be ill off, in evil plight, unlucky, Od., etc.; κακῶς π. ὑπό τινος to be ill used, ill treated by . . , Aesch.; often with an adj., κακά, λυγρὰ π. Il., etc.; δεινὰ π. Dem.; also with a Subst., ἄλγεα π. etc., Hom.

εὖ πάσχειν to be well off, in good case, lucky, Theogn., etc.; also, to receive benefits, opp. to εὖ δρᾶν, Aesch., etc.; so, ἀγαθὰ π. Hdt., etc.

without a limiting word, it always refers to evil, being used for κακῶς or κακὰ π., μάλα πολλ᾽ ἔπαθον Od., etc.; μή τι πάθηις lest thou…

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Verb-PAI-1P — Verb · present · active · indicative · first person · plural
present active indicative — an action in progress.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAI-1P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: first Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

26%suffer

suffer26% · 11×suffering14% · 6×suffered10% · 4×having suffered10% · 4×have suffered5% · 2×he suffered5% · 2×suffers5% · 2×did you suffer2% · 1×other renderings24% · 10×

42 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 18 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

verb98%adverbial3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 40 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

πολύςmuch, many, often

καίand, even, also,ἄνθρωποςa man, one of thἵναin order that, s

ἐγώ

ὁArticle theὄνομαname, character,καίand, even, also,

ὁArticle the

μετάὅτιthat, since, becκαίand, even, also,

καίand, even, also, nam

ὅςἀγαθοποιέωI do that which εἰCond

μέλλωI am about to

ἄνθρωποςa man, one of thὅς

πάσχωsuffer,40×

what comes after →

καίand, even, also, nam

ἀποδοκιμάζωI reject after tἐξουδενέωI ignore, despisἀνίστημιI raise up, set

ὁArticle the

Χριστόςanointed, the Meὑπακοήobedience

αὐτός

ἐνπειράζωI try, tempt, teκαταρτίζωI fit together,

ἀπό

ὁArticle theκαταβολήa foundation, de

ὑπό

αὐτόςπολύςmuch, many, ofte

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπάσχω · 40× in the New Testament

1 Peter Luke Acts Hebrews Matthew Mark 1 Corinthians 1 Thessalonians 2 Corinthians 2 Thessalonians 2 Timothy Galatians

Across the New Testament14 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

πολύςmuch, many, often×Χριστόςanointed, the Messiah, the Christ×ἀπό×ἄνθρωποςa man, one of the human race×ὑπό×δεῖit is necessary, inevitable×μέλλωI am about to×ἀποδοκιμάζωI reject after testing, I disqualify×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Epistle of Barnabas The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 23c. AD 40

οὐ γὰρ ὡς πέφυκεν ὁ θεὸς εὖ ποιεῖν, οὕτως καὶ τὸ γινόμενον εὖ πάσχειν, ἐπεὶ τοῦ μὲν αἱ δυνάμεις ὑπερβάλλουσι, τὸ δ’ ἀσθενέστερον ὂν ἢ ὥστε δέξασθαι τὸ μέγεθος αὐτῶν ἀπεῖπεν ἄν, εἰ μὴ διεμετρήσατο σταθμησάμενος εὐαρμόστως ἑκάστῳ τὸ ἐπιβάλλον.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.51c. AD 75–95

καὶ ὁ μὲν θεὸς ταῦτα προστάξας αὐτοῖς πάσχειν μετοικίζει τὸν Ἄδαμον καὶ τὴν Εὔαν ἐκ τοῦ κήπου εἰς ἕτερον χωρίον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 5.5c. AD 100

ἔτι δὲ καὶ τοῦτο, ἀδελφοί μου: εἰ ὁ κύριος ὑπέμεινεν παθεῖν περὶ τῆς ψυχῆς ἡμῶν, ὢν παντὸς τοῦ κόσμου κύριος ᾧ εἶπεν ὁ θεὸς ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου: Ποιήσωμεν ἄνθρωπον κατ̓ εἰκόνα καὶ καθ̓ ὁμοίωσιν ἡμετέραν: πῶς οὖν ὑπέμεινεν ὑπὸ χειρὸς ἀνθρώπων παθεῖν;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC 5th c. AD

P.Mil.Vogl. 1 24Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 117

οὖν ἐστιν; ἐγὼ πεπεισμένος μου τῇ διανοίᾳ μηθὲν κακῷ ἢ πονηρῷ συνειδώς, δοκῶ μηδὲν παθεῖν· ὃ ἐὰν οὖν ἐφίδω πῶς μου τὰ πραγμάτια χωρεῖ πάλιν σοι δηλώσω, κύριε· οἶδα

P.Amh. 2 78Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 184

r Αὐρηλίῳ Ἀντωνείνῳ ἑκατοντάρχῳ παρὰ Στοτοήτιος Ἀγχώφεως ἀπὸ κώμης Σοκνοπαίου Νήσου. βίαν πάσχων ἑκάστοτε ὑπὸ Ἑκύσεως ἐπικαλουμένου Εὐπορᾶ τινος ἀπὸ τῆς αὐτῆς κώμης ὅστις πολλὰ μὲν καὶ

P.Prag. 3 209Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 184

Αὐρηλίῳ Ἀντωνείνῳ ἑκατοντάρχῳ παρὰ Στοτοήτιος Ἀγχώφεως ἀπὸ κώμης Σοκνοπαίου Νήσου. βίαν πάσχω ἑκάστοτε ὑπὸ Ἐκύσεως ἐπικαλουμένου Εὐπορᾶ τινος ἀπὸ τῆς αὐτῆς κώμης, ὅστις πολλὰ μὲν καὶ

BSB	If we are afflicted, it is for your comfort and salvation; if we are comforted, it is for your comfort, which accomplishes in you patient endurance of the same sufferings we experience.
KJV	And whether we be afflicted, it is for your consolation and salvation, which is effectual in the enduring of the same sufferings which we also suffer: or whether we be comforted, it is for your consolation and salvation.
ASV	But whether we are afflicted, it is for your comfort and salvation; or whether we are comforted, it is for your comfort, which worketh in the patient enduring of the same sufferings which we also suffer:
YLT	and whether we be in tribulation, [it is] for your comfort and salvation, that is wrought in the enduring of the same sufferings that we also suffer; whether we are comforted, [it is] for your comfort and salvation;
WEB	But if we are afflicted, it is for your comfort and salvation. If we are comforted, it is for your comfort, which produces in you the patient enduring of the same sufferings which we also suffer.
BBE	But if we are troubled, it is for your comfort and salvation; or if we are comforted, it is for your comfort, which takes effect through your quiet undergoing of the same troubles which we undergo:

2 Corinthians 1:6 — Word Study

Cite / Share This Page

Deep Study — 2 Corinthians 1:6

Context — The Comfort in Sufferinggenerated

Cross References

The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 11 references, hung on the phrase they belong to

Nave’s Topical Bible — the subjects this verse is filed under

The Key Word — παρακλήσεως, paraklēsisgenerated

How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

Sentence Structuregenerated

Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

Reflection Questionsgenerated

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Modern formal

Tyndale line

Strictly literal

From the Latin

Simplified

Word by word, the decisions they made

The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Word by word, across the editions

The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

Lexicons — every word in 2 Corinthians 1:6

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before